JP2014046162A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To execute a ball-entry performance while reducing processing load of a main control device and a performance control device.SOLUTION: When having stored a lottery element corresponding to a second special symbol, a main control device 70 transmits a number-of-actuation-storage increase performance command to a performance control device 124 (F14-F44). However, the number-of-actuation-storage increase performance command is not transmitted if the number of storages reaches an upper limit. When a game ball enters a lower operation-start winning hole, the main control device 70 transmits a lower operation-start hole ball entry command representing that the game ball enters the lower operation-start winning hole (F14-F54). The lower operation-start hole ball entry command is information to be transmitted despite the number of storages of the lottery element. This configuration dispenses with check processing of the number of storages in the main control device 70 so as to reduce the processing load in the transmission. Further, the performance control device 124 can execute a ball entry performance by just checking the lower operation-start hole ball entry command so as to reduce the processing load of the performance control device.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, when the probability of winning a special symbol is in a high probability state, the special symbol is memorized to the maximum in a state where it is not actively disclosed to the player (so-called latent probability change). In such a case, there is disclosed a technique for executing a suggestion effect that suggests whether the current internal state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state by intentionally causing a game ball to enter the starting prize opening (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the technique of Patent Literature 1, as an example of the suggestion effect, the background image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display is changed from “underwater background image” to “daytime mountain background image” or “daytime mountain background image” ”To“ night sky background image ”or the like, suggesting a situation where the current internal state may be a high probability state.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 1, when the player desires to execute the suggestion effect, the game ball is placed at the start winning opening even though the number of special symbols stored is maximized. It is considered that the utilization rate of the gaming machine can be improved because the ball is entered.

JP 2010-17425 A

  The above-described prior art not only performs control to make it difficult to grasp whether the winning probability of a special symbol is in a high probability state, but also performs a suggestive effect appropriately, thereby increasing the probability of winning a special symbol. There is an advantage in that the effect of the production is enhanced by giving the player an opportunity to notice that it is in a state.

  Here, in the technique of Patent Document 1, an invalid start winning designation command is used in order to execute such a suggestive effect. This invalid start winning designation command is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device when a game ball enters the start opening when the stored number of lottery elements has reached the upper limit “4”. It is a command.

And in the technique of patent document 1, said suggestion effect is performed based on this invalid start prize designation | designated command.
However, when a game ball effect is to be executed when a game ball enters the start port, such a ball game effect cannot be controlled only by an invalid start winning designation command.

In other words, the invalid start winning designation command has a property of being transmitted when the number of stored lottery elements reaches the upper limit, and thus is a command that is not transmitted before the number of stored lottery elements reaches the upper limit.
For this reason, there is a problem that the invalid start winning designation command alone is not sufficient in the case of trying to execute some effect at the time of entry from the stage before the number of stored lottery elements reaches the upper limit.

  In this regard, it is conceivable to set not only the invalid start winning designation command used after the number of lottery elements has reached the upper limit, but also the valid start winning designation command as a command before the number of lottery elements has reached the upper limit. . Then, it is assumed that the above-mentioned effect at the time of entering a ball is executed using two types of commands such as a valid start winning designation command and an invalid start winning designation command. However, if there are two types of commands, the processing burden may increase for both the main controller on the transmission side and the production control apparatus on the reception side.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when an effect at the time of entering a ball is executed when a game ball enters the start opening, the effect at the time of entering the ball is executed while reducing the processing load of the main control device or the effect control device. It is an object to provide a technique that can be used.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: A gaming machine of the present solution includes a main control device that controls the progress of a game, an effect control device that controls the contents of the effect based on notification of information from the main control device, Detection means for detecting that a winning ball has been entered, lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element as if a lottery opportunity has occurred when the detection means detects that a game ball has entered, and the lottery element The internal lottery execution means for executing the internal lottery related to the player's profit (for example, the profit that the variable winning device is activated), and the internal lottery is executed as a trigger (for example, A symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a manner that represents the result of the internal lottery, and a symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a manner that represents the result of the internal lottery. The lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number when the lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the display to be started is satisfied, and the main control When an entry of a game ball is detected by the detection means provided in the apparatus, an entry of a game ball is detected by the detection means regardless of the number of lottery elements stored by the lottery element storage means This is a gaming machine provided with a ball detection information notification means for notifying the effect control device of ball detection information indicating that the ball has been played.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below.
(1) The progress of the game is controlled by the main controller. The main control device is a device that is the center of the control operation, and controls the overall operation of the gaming machine.
(2) The content of the effect is controlled by the effect control device based on the notification of the information (command) from the main control device in (1) above. The effect control device is a device that controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the gaming machine, and takes charge of the control regarding the contents of the effect.

(3) Detection means (upper start opening prize opening switch or lower start opening prize opening switch) is provided for detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined winning opening (upper starting winning opening or lower starting winning opening). Yes. When a game ball enters a predetermined winning opening, the detection means detects a game ball entering. However, when the gaming ball does not enter a predetermined winning opening, the game ball does not enter.

(4) When an entry of a game ball is detected by the detection means of (3) above, a lottery element is acquired as if a lottery opportunity has occurred. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal of generating this lottery opportunity. Thus, when a lottery opportunity occurs, a lottery element is acquired each time.
(5) An internal lottery (special symbol lottery) related to the player's profit is executed using the lottery element acquired in (4) above.

(6) When the internal lottery of (5) above is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(7) If a lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the start of symbol variation display in (6) above is satisfied (during symbol variation display or before symbol stop display is completed), The acquired lottery elements are stored in the order of acquisition, for example. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four per symbol) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit.

(8) Then, the main control device of (1) described above is related to the number of lottery elements stored in (7) above when the detection means in (3) detects the entry of a game ball. First, entry detection information (upper start winning opening entry command or lower start winning opening entry command) indicating that the entry of a game ball has been detected is notified to the effect control device of (2) above.

  In this way, in the present solution, the incoming ball detection information is transmitted regardless of the number of stored lottery elements. For example, regardless of whether the number of lottery elements stored is “0” or “1”, the entry detection information is transmitted when an entry of a game ball is detected. For this reason, even if the number of stored lottery elements has reached the upper limit (four), the entry detection information is transmitted when the entry of a game ball is detected.

Therefore, since the entrance detection information of the present solution is information that is transmitted under any circumstances as long as the entrance of a game ball is detected, the main controller transmits the entrance detection information. Thus, the process of confirming the number of storages becomes unnecessary, and as a result, the processing load on the main controller can be reduced.
In addition, the reception-side production control device can also perform an effect at the time of entry upon receipt of the entry detection information, so if any entry detection information is confirmed, some effect at the time of entry is executed. As a result, the processing burden on the production control device can be reduced.

  In this regard, when performing an effect at the time of entering a ball based on an invalid start winning designation command, it is necessary to transmit the invalid start winning designation command after confirming the stored number in the main controller on the transmission side, and the control burden accordingly. Will increase. Further, in the receiving side production control device, even if a game ball is detected before the number of lottery elements reaches the upper limit, an invalid start winning designation command is not transmitted. Before reaching the upper limit, it is not possible to execute the effect at the time of entering the ball.

  On the other hand, in this solution, since the unified entrance detection information is transmitted before and after the storage of the lottery element reaches the upper limit, the entrance detection information is received even when the entrance detection information is transmitted. In addition, when executing the effect at the time of entering the ball, the control process can be simplified, and the effect at the time of entering the ball can be executed while reducing the processing load of the main control device and the effect control device.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1, in which the detection means detects that a game ball has entered the first winning opening as the predetermined winning opening; Second lottery means for detecting that a game ball has entered a second winning opening different from the first winning opening as the predetermined winning opening, and the lottery element obtaining means includes the first detecting means When the game ball is detected to enter, the first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring the first lottery element as the first lottery opportunity as the lottery opportunity has occurred, and the second detection means A second lottery element obtaining unit that obtains a second lottery element when a second lottery opportunity as the lottery opportunity has occurred when an entry is detected, and the internal lottery execution unit includes the first lottery execution unit 1st inside which relates to the profit of the player using the element First internal lottery execution means for executing a selection, and second internal lottery execution means for executing a second internal lottery related to the profit of the player using the second lottery element, the symbol display means, When the first internal lottery is executed, the first symbol as the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and then the first symbol is stopped in a manner representing the result of the first internal lottery. When the first symbol display means to be displayed and the second internal lottery are executed, the second symbol as the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and then the result of the second internal lottery And a second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing, wherein the lottery element storage means before the start condition that allows the variable symbol display of the first symbol to be started is satisfied. 1 lottery opportunity A first lottery element storage means for storing the first lottery elements acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit, and a start condition that enables starting the variable display of the second symbol If the second lottery opportunity occurs before the condition is satisfied, the second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery element acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, The ball detection information notifying means is configured to detect the second lottery element stored in the second lottery element storage means when the second detection means detects that a game ball has entered the second lottery element. The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection control device is notified of the incoming ball detection information indicating that the incoming ball of the gaming ball has been detected by the detecting means.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) First detection means (upper start opening winning opening switch) is provided for detecting that a game ball has entered the first winning opening (upper start winning opening). When the game ball enters the first winning opening, the first detecting means detects the entering of the game ball. However, when the game ball does not enter the first winning opening, the game ball is detected. Not.
(2) Second detection means (lower start port winning port switch) is provided for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning port (lower start winning port). When the game ball enters the second winning opening, the second detecting means detects the game ball entering, but when the game ball does not enter the second winning opening, the game ball is detected. Not.

(3) When the first detection means of (1) detects the entry of a game ball, the first lottery element is acquired as the first lottery trigger has occurred.
(4) When the second detection means of (2) detects the entry of a game ball, the second lottery element is acquired as the occurrence of the second lottery trigger.

(5) The first internal lottery (first special symbol lottery) related to the player's profit is executed using the first lottery element acquired in (3) above.
(6) The second internal lottery (second special symbol lottery) related to the player's profit is executed using the second lottery element acquired in (4) above.

(7) When the first internal lottery of (5) above is executed, the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the basis of this, and the first symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the first internal lottery. Stopped display. It takes a certain amount of time (variation time and stop display time) from when the first symbol variation display is started until the stop display is performed. Once the first symbol variation display is started, The next internal lottery is not performed until the stop display is completed.

(8) When the second internal lottery of (6) above is executed, the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed on the basis of this, and the second symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the second internal lottery. Stopped display. It takes a certain amount of time (variation time and stop display time) from when the second symbol variation display is started until the stop display is performed. Once the second symbol variation display is started, The next internal lottery is not performed until the stop display is completed.

(9) The first condition (7) before the start condition for enabling the start of the variable display of the first symbol is satisfied (before the variable symbol of the first symbol is displayed or before the stop display of the first symbol is completed) When a lottery opportunity occurs, the first lottery element acquired thereby is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (four).

(10) The second condition (8) before the start condition for enabling the start of the variable display of the second symbol is satisfied (before the variable symbol of the second symbol is displayed or before the stop display of the second symbol is completed). When a lottery opportunity occurs, the second lottery elements acquired thereby are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4).

(11) When the second detection means of (2) detects the entry of a game ball, regardless of the number of second lottery elements stored in (10) above, (2) The second detection means notifies the effect control device of the incoming ball detection information indicating that the incoming ball of the game ball has been detected.

  As described above, according to the present solution means, the entry detection information is transmitted only when the entry of the game ball is detected by the second detection means. For this reason, when the entry of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the effect at the time of entry is not executed, but only when the entry of the game ball is detected by the second detection means. This is an effective control method when performing an effect.

  For example, in a game specification in which the first detection means is in the left-handed area, the second detection means is in the right-handed area, and a right-handed strike is requested in the time shortening state, the first detecting means almost completely plays the game ball in the time shortening state. No incoming ball is detected. When the effect at the time of entering the ball is executed only in the time shortening state, the detection information of the game ball by the first detection means is useless, so that the game ball has been entered by the second detection means. By transmitting the entrance detection information only when it is detected, the control process can be rationalized.

  In the present solution, if the second winning opening is arranged inside the variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory), the variable start winning device is frequently operated in the time shortening state. Since the chances of entering the starting prize device will also increase, the occurrence frequency of the entry effect executed at the time of entry can be improved accordingly.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is notified in Solution 1 or 2 when the winning detection result is obtained in the internal lottery and notification of the entry detection information is made during the change of the symbol. , On the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, to execute a pitching opportunity winning effect to execute a pitching opportunity winning effect that teaches the player that the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery A gaming machine characterized by further comprising means.

  In this solution, when the notification of the entry detection information is received during the fluctuation of the winning, the winning result is obtained on the condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied (the winner was selected in the random number lottery for the effect). The winning opportunity winning effect is executed to teach the player what is being done.

  For this reason, in the present solution, since the player is instructed that the winning is based on the winning opportunity winning effect, the game specification that does not know at which timing the winning is taught during the variation of the design and It has become.

  In order to execute this entry opportunity winning effect, it is necessary to enter a game ball into a predetermined start opening. Therefore, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball for the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved accordingly.

In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he has generated a winning opportunity winning effect depending on his / her game condition, and the range of effects can be widened.
Furthermore, in this case as well, since the entrance opportunity winning effect is executed using the entrance detection information, the efficiency of the control process can be improved.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution solves the problem in that, when the notification of the incoming ball detection information is received during the change of the symbol in the solution 3, on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising a ball opportunity announcement effect execution means for executing a ball opportunity announcement effect with a content for notifying that there is a possibility that an entry ball opportunity winning effect will be executed.

  In this solution, when the notification of the entry detection information is received during the change of the design, the specified performance execution condition is satisfied (whether it is won by the random number lottery for the performance, or the performance that can be executed) On the condition that the executable flag is ON), the entrance opportunity announcement effect is executed with a content for notifying that the entrance opportunity winning effect may be executed.

  And in order to perform this entrance opportunity notice effect, it is necessary to make a game ball enter a predetermined start opening. Therefore, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball for the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved accordingly.

In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if a ball entering opportunity notice effect has been generated according to his / her own game condition.
Furthermore, in this case as well, the entrance trigger announcement effect is executed using the entrance detection information, so that the efficiency of the control process can be improved.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 4, when the entry opportunity announcement effect execution means receives the notification of the entry detection information, whether or not the prescribed effect execution condition is satisfied. The game machine is characterized by determining whether or not to execute the above-described entry opportunity notice effect.

  In this solving means, every time notification of the entrance detection information is received, it is determined whether or not a specified effect execution condition is satisfied, and the entrance opportunity announcement effect is executed. For this reason, since it is possible to generate a pitching opportunity notice effect many times during one symbol change, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect while increasing the execution opportunity of the effect.

  Solving means 6: The gaming machine of the present solving means is characterized in that, in the solving means 5, special game executing means for executing a special game triggered by the symbol display means being stopped and displayed in a specific winning manner; When the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and the special condition is satisfied with respect to the winning result, after the special game is finished by the special game executing means, it corresponds to the number of times of the variable display of the symbol. Until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the first specific number, the internal lottery performed by the internal lottery execution means is higher than the low probability state from the low probability state in which the winning is obtained with at least a normal probability A transition is made to a high probability state in which winning is achieved with probability, and at least from the non-time shortened state where the lottery trigger occurs at a normal frequency, Then, the transition to the high probability time shortening state by transitioning to the time shortening state in which the occurrence of the lottery trigger is possible at a high frequency, and then the variation number after the special game reaches the second specific number of times, Special time shortening state transition means for transitioning to the special time shortening state by transitioning to the low probability state and the low probability state shortening state which is the time shortening state, and transition to the special time shortening state after completion of the special game If the notification of the incoming ball detection information is received during the change of the symbol at the time of winning, the special time reduction state is entered after the special game is completed on condition that a special performance execution condition is satisfied. Special time shortening state transition teaching effect execution means for executing a special time shortening state transition teaching effect for instructing the player to transition is further provided. It is a game machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A special game is executed when a symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific winning manner. The special game basically corresponds to a 6-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot game, but includes a jackpot game or the like in which it is not possible to actually get a ball even if it is a 6-round jackpot.

(2) If the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and special conditions are satisfied for the winning result (if winning in a time-reduced state, 15-round probability variable symbols When the 6-round probability variation symbol 2), after the special game according to (1) above, until the number of variations after special game corresponding to the number of variation display of the symbol reaches the first specific number (for example, 8 times) In the meantime, the low-probability state is shifted to the high-probability state, the non-time shortening state is transitioned to the time shortening state, and the high-probability time shortening state is transitioned. 100 times), the state is shifted to a low probability time shortening state that is a low probability state and a time shortening state. That is, when this process is executed, after the special game is over, the state is shifted to a special time reduction state in which a high probability time reduction state is reached until the first specific number of times and a low probability time reduction state is reached until the second specific number of times. The

  Here, “high probability time shortening state” means that the winning probability of the internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is set to a high probability (for example, low probability is 1/99 → high probability is about 1/15). The winning probability of the lottery (normal symbol lottery) is set to a high probability (for example, low probability of 25/251 → high probability of about 249/251), and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0. 25). Is set to an extended opening time (for example, about 2.5 seconds and opened twice), and the so-called electric chew support is performed. It is in a state.

  The “low probability time shortened state” means that the winning probability of the internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is set to a low probability (for example, about 1/99) and the winning probability of the operation lottery (normal symbol lottery) is high. (For example, 25/251 with low probability → 249/251 with high probability), set to a length (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and variable start winning device This is a state set to an extended open time (for example, about 2.5 seconds and open twice), in which the so-called electric chew support is performed.

(3) After receiving the notification of the entry detection information during the change of the symbol at the time of winning that will be shifted to the special time shortening state of (2) after the special game of (1) is completed, a special performance On condition that the execution condition is satisfied (winning in the random number lottery for production), after the completion of the special game of (1) above, the player is informed of the transition to the special time reduction state of (2) above. The special time shortening state transition teaching effect taught is executed.

  In this solution, when receiving the notification of the entry detection information during the change of the symbol at the time of winning that is to be shifted to the special time reduction state, the special performance execution condition is satisfied (the random number lottery for the performance). The special time shortening state transition teaching effect is executed on the condition that it was won in the above).

  In order to execute this special time shortening state transition teaching effect, it is necessary to make a game ball enter a predetermined start port. Therefore, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball for the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved accordingly.

In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if a special time shortening state transition teaching effect has been generated according to his / her own game condition.
Furthermore, in this case, the special time shortening state transition teaching effect is executed using the ball detection information, so that the efficiency of the control process can be improved.

  Solving means 7: The gaming machine of the present solving means according to any one of the solving means 3 to 6, wherein the entry detection information notifying means sends the entry detection information to the effect control device regardless of the gaming state. The entry opportunity winning effect execution means, the entry opportunity announcement effect execution means, or the special time reduction state transition teaching effect execution means, the number of changes after the special game since the high probability time reduction state is started. Using the received ball detection information received during a period until the predetermined number of times, the ball trigger opportunity winning effect, the ball trigger notice effect or the special time shortening state transition teaching effect is executed. This is a gaming machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The ball entry detection information is notified from the main control device to the effect control device regardless of the gaming state. In other words, the entry detection information is sent from the main control device to the effect control device regardless of whether the gaming state is the special game, the high probability time shortening state, or the low probability non-time shortening state. To be transmitted.

(2) In addition, in the entrance opportunity winning effect, the entrance opportunity announcement effect, and the special time shortening state transition teaching effect, the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches a predetermined number (4 times) after the high probability time shortening state is started. It is executed using the incoming ball detection information received during the period up to. The predetermined number may be the same value as the first specific number or the second specific number, or may be a different value.

  For this reason, the main control device only needs to transmit the ball entry detection information under any circumstances, so that determination processing such as the internal state is unnecessary. That is, it is not necessary to perform processing to determine that the entrance detection information is transmitted because it is in this state, or to determine that the entrance detection information is not transmitted because it is in this state, and the control burden of the main control device is reduced. Can do.

  On the other hand, after the predetermined number of times has been exceeded, the effect control device does not execute the effect at the time of entry based on the entry detection information (the entry opportunity winning effect, the entrance opportunity announcement effect, the special time shortening state transition teaching effect). After the predetermined number of times, even if the incoming ball detection information is received, it may be ignored, and the control burden can be reduced as in the case of the main controller.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, since the ball detection information is transmitted regardless of the number of lottery elements stored, the control process when transmitting / receiving the ball detection information is simplified, and the main control device and the effect control are performed. The processing burden on the apparatus can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the front view which showed the game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of control processing executed between the main control device and the effect control device when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening (this embodiment). FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of control processing executed between the main control device and the effect control device when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening (comparative example). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state and normal area). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (high probability time reduction state and 1st area). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (high probability time shortening state and 2nd area). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (high probability time shortening state and 3rd area). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (high probability time reduction state, 4th area). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / special high probability section). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low-probability time shortening state / time-short middle-low probability section). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state / normal section). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (High probability time shortening state and 1st area and 2nd area). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (High probability time shortening state and 3rd area). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (High probability time shortening state and 4th area). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (High probability time shortening state and special high probability section). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state / time-short / medium / low-probability section). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an area management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an area setting process. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure showing the flow of reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game when “6 round probability variation 1” is applied. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bodied effect executed during a big hit game when the “15-round probability variation symbol” is met. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a countdown zone (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a countdown zone (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a countdown zone (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a countdown zone (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a countdown zone (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the other example of production at the time of winning in the final change of a countdown zone (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the other example of production at the time of winning by the final change of a countdown zone (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows another example of an effect at the time of winning by the final change of a countdown zone (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing another example of production at the time of winning in the final change of the countdown zone (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of a revival production in the last change of a countdown zone (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the revival effect in the last change of a countdown zone (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production at the time of winning in the middle of the countdown production performed in a countdown zone (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production at the time of winning in the middle of the countdown production performed in a countdown zone (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the effect of the special light emission effect performed in the middle of the countdown effect (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the effect of the special light emission effect performed during the countdown effect (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing the example of the effect at the time of winning after the countdown effect performed in a countdown zone is completed. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect performed when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 2" in a normal mode, and an example of mode change production (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect performed when it corresponds to "6 rounds probable variation 2" in a normal mode, and the example of a mode shift production (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the notice intensity | strength determination process at the time of lower start winning opening entrance. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a notice production | presentation prohibition area setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the notification intensity | strength determination process at the time of a change start. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special big hit effect pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 4th section big hit effect pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a success prohibition area setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production pattern selection process at the time of special deviation. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | generation pattern selection process at the time of a 4th area shift | offset | difference. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a winning symbol display effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the notification effect management process according to intensity | strength. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the notification effect pattern selection process according to intensity | strength. It is a figure which shows a 1st special symbol scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows a 2nd special symbol scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the notice effect pattern selection table for initial values. It is a figure which shows the notice effect pattern selection table for loss weakness. It is a figure which shows the notice effect pattern selection table for out of middle. It is a figure which shows the extraordinary strong notice effect pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the notification effect pattern selection table for weak hits. It is a figure which shows the hit announcement effect pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the hit strong notice effect pattern selection table. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the setting method of notice intensity | strength (the 1). It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the setting method of notice intensity | strength (the 2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect switch button management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a player participation type production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation selection process at the time of presentation switch button press. It is a figure which shows a stage progress lottery table. It is a timing chart which shows change of various states at the time of winning performed by the last change of a countdown zone. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a lamp drive process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (benefits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game is, for example, a game acquired by the player. The game value can be converted based on the number of balls. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. Further, in the game area 8a, an upper start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 25, a variable start winning apparatus 28, a variable winning apparatus 30 and the like are distributed and installed around the effect unit 40. Yes. Among these, the upper start winning opening 26 and the variable start winning device 28 are respectively arranged up and down in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning holes 22 are arranged on the lower side of the left side of the game area 8a. The other remaining regular winning opening 25 is arranged on the right side of the game area 8a. Further, the variable winning device 30 is arranged on the lower side of the right side portion of the game area 8a.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the upper start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 25, or the variable start at the time of operation. For example, the player enters the winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the upper start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the normal winning opening 25, enter the variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, or when activated. There is a possibility of entering the variable start winning device 28. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the game balls that have entered the upper start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 are It is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, the start gate 20 is arranged in the right area of the game area 8a. Therefore, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 20, or when the game ball is entered into the variable winning device 30, the variable start winning device 28 is played with the game ball. When the player enters the game ball, it is necessary to hit the game ball in the right side area (right hit area) in the game area 8a (so-called “right hit” is executed).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the lower start winning opening 28a (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28b, and these opening / closing members 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28b are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the lower start winning opening 28a (the game ball is (There is no gap to enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right open / close members 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the lower start winning opening 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which it is possible to enter a game ball, and can enter the lower start winning opening 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the lower start winning port 28a at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a) at the time of the opening operation, and the balls are generated randomly.

  The variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and wins a big winning opening (no reference sign). Make it possible (special electric equipment, special winning event generation means). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, the winning in the big winning opening is impossible (the big winning opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered the winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, all of the game balls 8 that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port). The game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device. 35, a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided (normal symbol display means, special symbol display means, lottery element storage means).

  Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 (first symbol display means) and the second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means) are, for example, a 7-segment LED (with a dot) and a special symbol change state and a stop state. Can be displayed (symbol display means). In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, 0 stored number is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 stored number is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is stored. For example, four are displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing that every time a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26. Every time the change of the special symbol is started, the display mode is decreased one by one every time the ball is entered (up to 4). Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that every time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port). The display mode changes to a later display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced by one each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first start symbol 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port) in a state in which the second special symbol can already start to change (during stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the ball. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  In addition, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, five LEDs corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38a, the short time state display lamp 38b, the big hit type display lamps 38c and 38d, and the launch position designation display lamp 38e, respectively. Yes. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of game board unit: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m improve the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling and, for example, emit transmitted light by a built-in light emitter (LED or the like), thereby performing a stunning operation. can do. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge opening 40h is open toward the front surface, and the opening position thereof is located immediately above the upper start winning opening 26. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is discharged from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the upper start winning port 26 just below it (however, it does not necessarily pass). Absent.).

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited.

  In addition, a light emitter 41 for production (for example, a spade-shaped ornament) is attached to the center right portion of the production unit 40. The illuminant 41 performs an effect by light emission of the built-in LED (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). For example, the illuminant 41 can be used as a hit confirmation lamp, and can emit light during a change at the time of winning when it is decided to enter a fireworks mode described later. A production example using the light emitter 41 will be described later.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes an upper start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28 and a variable winning device 30 corresponding to the upper start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 30, and a lower start winning port, respectively. A switch 82 (detection means, second detection means) and a count switch 84 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the upper start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, a winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 is transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87 and the panel relay terminal plate 87 due to the configuration of the game board unit 8. Are provided with wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is equipped (special privilege grant means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 to give various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, and the light emission. A process of causing the body 41 to emit light or actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 is performed.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, the panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and the movable body solenoid 57 and the light emitter 41 are connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the movable solenoid 57, and the light emitter 41 via the panel illumination board 138.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the upper starting winning port switch 80, the lower starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, and the lower starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 or the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer to the port.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event is generated). When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process (lottery element storage means, first lottery element storage means). Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the lower start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol memory update process (lottery element storage means, second lottery element storage means). Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).

[First special symbol memory update process (1)]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 10). Two methods can be adopted for the first special symbol memory update process.

  The first method is a method that does not generate an upper start winning a prize mouth command in the first special symbol memory update process. In the case of a countdown zone, which will be described later, when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26, when the effect at the time of entering the ball is not executed, the upper start winning opening command is not particularly necessary, so the first method is effective. It is.

  The second method is a method of generating an upper start winning a prize mouth command in the first special symbol memory update process. In the countdown zone, which will be described later, when an effect at the time of entering a game is executed when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26, an upper start winning end command is required, so the second method is effective. It is. Here, the first method will be described first.

  Step S30: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The first special figure working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9).

  Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means, first lottery element) Acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as a random number value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is in operation of the time reduction function or whether it is a big hit. If the time reduction function is not in operation other than the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the time reduction function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. In addition, when the operation memory of the first special symbol and the operation memory of the second special symbol both remain except during the big hit, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol). This is because the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is performed frequently, especially during the operation of the time shortening function. In addition, while the time shortening function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 25/251 → about 249/251), and In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when not in operation → 2 .5 seconds), and the number of times of release increases (for example, increases from 1 to 2 when not in operation), so that the game ball can be fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable) As long as the change of the second special symbol is prioritized, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) unless the start winning device 28 is interrupted for a period of time until the operation is stopped. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into, for example, step S36a for determining “time reduction function in operation” and step S36b for determining “big hit”.

  Step S37: When the time shortening function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[First special symbol memory update process (2)]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing another procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process. In the first special symbol memory update process (1) described above, the method of not generating the upper start winning a prize command in the first special symbol memory update process has been described. The following example procedure is used to generate a command.

  Step S30a: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S38b. On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31 and subsequent steps.

  The main control CPU 72 executes processing from step S31 to step S38a. In addition, about the processing content of step S31-step S38a, it is the same as that of the content demonstrated by the previous destination determination effect management process (1).

  Step S38b: The main control CPU 72 generates an upper start winning opening entry command (entrance detection information) (entrance detection information notifying means). This command is generated when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26, and even if the number of memories of the first special symbol has reached the maximum, the number of memories of the first special symbol is the maximum. Even if the limit is not reached, the command is generated (first special symbol hold winning command).

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process includes a special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories generated in step S38a, a start opening winning sound control command, and an upper start winning opening input generated in step S38b. This is for transmitting a command to the effect control device 124 (memory number notifying means, entering detection information notifying means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S48a. On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 11), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means, second lottery element) Acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is determined only in the previous step S45a whether or not the big hit is made, and the operating state of the time reduction function is not determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game other than the big hit, the first special In order to change the second special symbol over the symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol, regardless of the operating state of the time reduction function, except during the big hit, and the result is pre-readed. This is because it can be used. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S48a: The main control CPU 72 generates a lower start winning opening entry command (entrance detection information) (entrance detection information notifying means). This command is generated when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, and even if the number of memories of the second special symbol reaches the maximum, the number of memories of the second special symbol is the maximum. Even if the limit is not reached, the command is generated (second special symbol hold winning command).

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, with respect to the second special symbol, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination production command, a production command when the number of working memories increases, a start opening winning sound control command, a lower start winning opening ball entering command and the like to the production control device 124 is completed. Performed (memory number notification means, ball detection information notification means) When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 show control processing executed between the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. It is a sequence diagram which shows a flow. FIG. 14 shows a sequence diagram of the present embodiment, and FIG. 15 shows a sequence diagram of a comparative example. Further, when the second method is adopted for the first special symbol memory update process, the same sequence as described below is performed when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening.

[F10: Entering the first game ball]
It is assumed that when the countdown zone described later is started, the number of first special symbols is “4” and the number of second special symbols is “0”. In this case, when the countdown zone is started, the variation of the first special symbol is started. Note that the variation of the first special symbol does not end until the end of this sequence. In this state, it is assumed that the first game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F12: 1st lottery element storage]
The first lottery element (big hit decision random number) corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F14: Command transmission]
When the first lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits to the effect control device 124 an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories and a command for entering a lower start prize opening. The

[F16: Direction during entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol based on the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, or executes a notice effect based on the lower start winning entry command To do.

[F20: Second game ball entry]
It is assumed that a second game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F22: Second lottery element storage]
The second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F24: Command transmission]
When the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits to the effect control device 124 an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories and a command for entering a lower start winning a prize opening. The

[F26: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol based on the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, or executes a notice effect based on the lower start winning entry command To do.

[F30: Third game ball entry]
It is assumed that a third game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F32: Third lottery element storage]
The third lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F34: Command transmission]
When the third lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits to the effect control device 124 an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories and a command for entering a lower start prize opening. The

[F36: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol based on the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, or executes a notice effect based on the lower start winning entry command To do.

[F40: Fourth game ball entry]
It is assumed that a fourth game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F42: 4th lottery element storage]
The fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F44: Command transmission]
When the fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits to the effect control device 124 an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories and a command for entering a lower start prize opening. The

[F46: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol based on the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, or executes a notice effect based on the lower start winning entry command To do.

[F50: 5th game ball entry]
It is assumed that the fifth game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.
In this case, since the storage of the lottery element relating to the second special symbol has already reached the upper limit, even if a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the fifth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol Is never remembered.

[F54: Command transmission]
As for the command transmission, since no lottery element is stored, an effect command for increasing the number of working memories is not transmitted, but a lower start winning entry game command is transmitted.

[F56: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes the notice effect based on the lower start winning opening entry command.

  The above is a sequence that can occur in the present embodiment, but the sequence of the comparative example is as shown in FIG.

[F110: First game ball entry]
It is assumed that when the countdown zone described later is started, the number of first special symbols is “4” and the number of second special symbols is “0”. In this case, when the countdown zone is started, the variation of the first special symbol is started. Note that the variation of the first special symbol does not end until the end of this sequence. In this state, it is assumed that the first game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F112: 1st lottery element storage]
The first lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F114: Command transmission]
When the first lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits an effect command for increasing the number of working memories to the effect control device 124. In the control processing of the comparative example, there is no lower start winning opening entry command.

[F116: Direction during entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol or executes a notice effect based on the effect command when the number of working memories increases.

[F120: Second game ball entry]
It is assumed that a second game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F122: Second lottery element storage]
The second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F124: Command transmission]
When the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits an effect command for increasing the number of working memories to the effect control device 124.

[F126: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol or executes a notice effect based on the effect command when the number of working memories increases.

[F130: Third game ball entry]
It is assumed that a third game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F132: Third lottery element storage]
The third lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F134: Command transmission]
When the third lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits an effect command for increasing the number of working memories to the effect control device 124.

[F136: Direction at the time of entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol or executes a notice effect based on the effect command when the number of working memories increases.

[F140: Fourth game ball entry]
It is assumed that a fourth game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F142: Fourth lottery element storage]
The fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a.

[F144: Command transmission]
When the fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, the main control device 70 transmits an effect command for increasing the number of working memories to the effect control device 124.

[F146: Direction during entry]
The effect control device 124 executes an effect of increasing the memory marker corresponding to the second special symbol or executes a notice effect based on the effect command when the number of working memories increases.

[F150: Fifth game ball entry]
It is assumed that the fifth game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a.
In this case, since the storage of the lottery element relating to the second special symbol has already reached the upper limit, even if a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the fifth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol Is never remembered.

[F154: Command transmission]
In addition, regarding the transmission of the command, since the lottery element is not stored, the production command when the number of working memories increases is not transmitted. Here, it is assumed that instead of this, an invalid start winning designation command indicating that an invalid winning has occurred is transmitted.

[F156: Direction during entry]
The effect control device 124 executes the notice effect based on the invalid start winning designation command.

  In this way, in the control process of the comparative example, because the effect at the time of entering the ball is executed based on the invalid start winning designation command, the main controller 70 on the transmission side transmits the invalid start winning designation command after confirming the stored number. Therefore, the control burden increases accordingly.

  In addition, in the production control device 124 on the receiving side, before the number of lottery elements stored reaches the upper limit value, it is necessary to execute an effect at the time of entry based on the production command when the number of working memories increases, and the number of lottery elements stored After reaching the upper limit value, it is necessary to execute the effect at the time of entering the ball based on the invalid start winning designation command. For this reason, since it is necessary to execute the effect at the time of entering the ball based on different commands before and after the number of stored lottery elements reaches the upper limit value, the processing load on the effect control device 124 increases as a result.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower start winning opening entry command is transmitted before and after the memory of the lottery element reaches the upper limit, the lower start winning opening entry command is also transmitted. When receiving the start winning opening entry command and executing the entry effect, the control process can be simplified, and the entry effect while reducing the processing load on the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124. Can be executed.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the lower start winning opening entry command is transmitted regardless of the number of lottery elements stored corresponding to the second special symbol. For example, regardless of whether the number of lottery elements stored is “0” or “1”, if it is detected that a game ball has entered the lower start winning slot 28a, A sphere command will be sent. For this reason, even if the stored number of lottery elements has reached the upper limit (four), if it is detected that a game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a, a lower start winning opening entering command is transmitted. Will be.

  Accordingly, the lower start winning opening entry command in this embodiment is a command that is transmitted under any circumstances as long as it is detected that a game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a. The control device 70 does not require a process for checking the number of memories when transmitting the lower start winning opening entry command, and as a result, the processing load on the main control device 70 can be reduced.

  In addition, the reception-side effect control device 124 can execute the effect at the time of entering the ball with the reception of the lower start winning port entry command as a trigger. A ball time effect can be executed, and as a result, the processing load of the effect control device 124 can be reduced.

  Further, when the above-described first method is adopted for the first special symbol memory update process, the lower start winning opening entry command only when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. Is sent. Therefore, for example, the upper start winning opening 26 is in a position where a left strike can be entered, the lower start prize opening 28a is in a position where a right strike can be entered, and a game specification that requires a right strike in a time-saving state. In the time shortening state, the game ball hardly enters the upper start winning opening 26.

  When the effect at the time of entering the ball is executed only in the time shortening state, the detection information of the game ball at the upper start winning opening 26 is useless, so that the game ball is placed at the lower start winning opening 28a. Only when the player has entered the ball, can the control process be rationalized by transmitting the lower start winning port entry command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the lower start winning port 28a is arranged inside the variable start winning device 28, if the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated in the time shortening state, the lower start winning port 28a is connected to the lower start winning port 28a. Since the chance of entering the ball also increases, the occurrence frequency of the entering ball effect that is executed when entering the ball can be improved accordingly.

  Furthermore, the main control device 70 only needs to transmit a lower start winning opening entry command in any situation, so that determination processing such as an internal state is not necessary. That is, since it is in this state, it is not necessary to perform processing for determining that the lower start winning opening entry command is to be transmitted, or in this state that it is determined not to transmit the lower start winning opening entry command, and the main control device 70 is not required. The control burden can be reduced.

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S46 in FIG. 13) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the upper start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of the above-described loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. However, in this embodiment, a non-probable variation symbol is not set. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner of 15 round probability variation big hit, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 6 times, 15 times), As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 15 times, these may be collectively referred to as “15 rounds”. In the present embodiment, not only 15 round big hits but also other types of 6 round big hits are provided as types of big hits. Moreover, about 15 round big hits and 6 round big hits, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) may be provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the winning result is obtained by the special symbol lottery and the special condition is satisfied with respect to the winning result (in the case of winning in the time shortening state, the non-time shortening state) In the case of 15-round probability variation symbol or 6-round probability variation symbol 2), the high probability time that is in the low probability state and the time shortening state until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the first specific number (for example, 8 times) After the transition to the shortened state, the transition to the low-probability time shortened state, which is the low-probability state and the time-shortened state, is performed until the number of changes after special game reaches the second specific number of times (for example, 100 times). Shortened state transition means).

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “15 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “15 round probability variable jackpot” is provided as a plurality of winning types (there may be more). In addition to the “15 round jackpot”, (2) “6 round probability variation big hit 1” and (3) “6 round probability variation big hit 2” are provided as a plurality of winning types (may be more than this) ).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “15 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “15 round probability variation jackpot”, “6 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to jackpot of “6 round probability variation jackpot 1”, “6 round probability variation jackpot 2” Corresponds to the big hit of “6 round probability variation 2”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[15 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “15 round probability variation symbol” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 15th round. The jackpot game of the “15-round probability variation pattern” is to give the player 15 balls (prize balls) for 15 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. In this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the game up to that point, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is finished, so that the “time reduction state” is transferred. A privilege is given to the player.

[6 round probability variation 1]
Also, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “6 round probability variation 1” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game) Execution means). In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the sixth round. The jackpot game of this “6 round probability variation 1” is to give 6 rounds (prize balls) to the player. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. In this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the game up to that point, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is finished, so that the “time reduction state” is transferred. A privilege is given to the player.

[6 round probability variation 2]
Furthermore, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “6 round probability variation 2” in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs. . In this case, the 6-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, and therefore, the winning in the big winning opening hardly occurs. Accordingly, the big hit game of “6 rounds probable variation 2” is completed within a short period of time without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “6 round probability variation 2”, after the jackpot game ends, for example, by operating both the “probability variation function” and the “time reduction function”, the result is “high probability A privilege that shifts to the “time reduction state” is given to the player together with a privilege that shifts to the “state”. Such a “six-round probability variation 2” has an impression that a “high probability state” and a “time reduction state” have suddenly occurred.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “15 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2”, the internal state is changed to “high probability state” after the jackpot game is over. ”And a privilege to shift to the“ time reduction state ”are given to the player. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to any of “15 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2”, The “high probability state” continues (restarts) after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game executing means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (Game) is executed (in this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small win game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins a big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so “high probability state” and “time reduction state” The privilege to transfer to is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value from the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and subtracts it. The later value is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the jackpot value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means, first internal lottery execution means, second Internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.6 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of sections corresponding to the gaming state are prepared, and the content of the variation pattern selected according to the staying section is also different. The following is an overview of the various sections.

(1) Normal section It is in a low probability state with respect to the special symbol lottery, and is also in a low probability state (state without electric Chu support) with respect to the normal symbol lottery. When the player starts playing with the pachinko machine 1, the game proceeds from the normal section.

(2) 1st section When the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state, the normal symbol lottery is also in the high probability state (with electric support), and the regular section corresponds to “6 round probability variation 1” This is a section in which the number of fluctuations after the special game takes a value of “1-3”.

(3) 2nd section When the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state, the normal symbol lottery is also in a high probability state (with electric support), and the regular section corresponds to “6 round probability variation 1” This is a section in which the number of fluctuations after the special game takes a value of “4”.

(4) Third section When the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state, the normal symbol lottery is also in a high probability state (with electric Chu support), and in the normal section, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation 1" This is a section in which the number of changes after the special game takes a value of “5-7”.

(5) 4th section When the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state, the normal symbol lottery is also in a high probability state (with electric Chu support), and in the normal section, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation 1" This is a section in which the number of changes after special game takes a value of “8”.

(6) Special high probability section High probability state for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery is also in a high probability state (with electronic support), and “15 round probability variation” or “6 round probability variation” in the regular interval. The number of changes after the special game is “1-8” when it corresponds to “symbol 2”, or when it corresponds to “15 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2” in the time shortening state. It is a section taking the value of “”. The difference between the first to fourth sections and the special high probability section is that the special fluctuation for the countdown zone, which will be described later, is selected in the first to fourth sections, while the special high section is selected. The probability interval is a point where no special variation is selected.

(7) Short, medium, low probability interval Low probability state for special symbol lottery, high probability state (state with electronic Chu support) for normal symbol lottery, “15 round probability variation symbol” or “6 rounds” in the normal interval The number of fluctuations after special game is “9 ～” when it falls under “Probability variation 2” or when it falls under “15 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol 1”, or “6 round probability variation symbol 2” This is a section having a value of “100”.

  These various sections are sections managed by the main control CPU 72, and the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern according to the stay section. Confirmation of the current stay section can be realized by confirming the section management status. Here, the “section management status” is a variable that holds an identification number corresponding to each section, the value is set after the end of the big hit game, and the value is updated when a specific number of fluctuations is reached. Is done. A unique identification number is assigned to each section, and the main control CPU 72 can confirm the current stay section by referring to the value of the section management status.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state / normal section).
This selection table is a table that is used when the low probability non-time shortened state (normal section) is off (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / first section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the first section in the high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means).
Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the deviation in the first section in the high probability time shortening state is set to the same fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is about 14.4 seconds, for example). The table configuration is for selecting one variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 21).

  Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 selects “21” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 21 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories. Since the non-reach fluctuation pattern 21 has a fluctuation time of 14.4 seconds and a stop display time of 0.6 seconds, the effect scale from the first fluctuation to the third fluctuation in the countdown zone described later is 15 seconds. can do.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / second section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the second section of the high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means).
Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the deviation in the second section in the high probability time shortening state is set to the same fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is about 15.0 seconds, for example). The table configuration is for selecting one variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 41).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “41” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 41 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories. Further, since the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern 41 is 15.0 seconds, it is possible to avoid a shift being confirmed during the countdown effect at the fourth variation in the countdown zone described later.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / third section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the third section in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means).
Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation in the third section of the high probability time shortening state is set to the same shortening fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is about 0.6 seconds, for example) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation. The selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 61).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “61” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 61 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / fourth section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the fourth section in the high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means).
Here, the variation pattern at the time of the deviation in the fourth section in the high probability time shortening state is set to the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 22.0 seconds, for example). The table configuration is to select one variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 81).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “81” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 81 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortened state / special high probability section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the special high probability section in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “105” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “106” to “108” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “101” to “105” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time shortening state / time short / medium / low probability section).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the short, medium, and low probability section in the low probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “121” to “128” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “121” to “125” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “126” to “128” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the fluctuation pattern numbers “121” to “125” are non-reach fluctuations due to time shortening fluctuations, a shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “122” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are roughly three types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types are “6 round probability variation 1”, “6 round probability variation 2”, and “15 round probability variation”. Each of the three types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “6 round probability variation 1”, “6 round probability variation 1a”, “6 round probability variation 1b”, “6 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “87”, “8” and “5” has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, “6 round probability variation 1”, “6 round probability variation 2”, and “15 round probability variation” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “6 round probability variation symbol 1” is 87/100 (= 87%), and the proportion of selecting “6 round probability variation symbol 2” is It is 8/100 (= 8%). In addition, the ratio at which “15 round probability variation” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 100%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “6 round probability variable symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H”. Will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.

[Non-temporary]
In the state where the time reduction function is not operating (non-short-time), when the “6 round probability variation 1” is met, the number of time reductions is given 8 times.
In the state where the time reduction function is not activated (non-temporary short), when the “6 round probability variation 2” or “15 round probability variation” is met, the time reduction is given 100 times.

[Short time]
When the time shortening function is activated (short time), if any of “6 round probability variation symbol 1”, “6 round probability variation symbol 2” or “15 round probability variation symbol” is met, the time reduction count is 100. Granted once.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “95” and “5” is the case where the denominator is 100. It corresponds to the ratio. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “6 round probability variation 1” and “15 round probability variation” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “6 round probability variation symbol 1” is 95/100 (= 95%), and the proportion of selecting “15 round probability variation symbol”. Is 5/100 (= 5%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 100%. However, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for “six-round probability variation symbol 2” is not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H” and “03H” in the lower bytes represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, and “6 round probability variable symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H01H”. Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
The fourth column from the left (right column) of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of short hours given after the big hit game ends. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is given regardless of the case of “6 round probability variation 1” or “15 round probability variation”. The number of time reductions given is the same as in the case of a big hit with the first special symbol.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated), so the second special symbol The working memory of is difficult to break. And in this embodiment, since the memory about the second special symbol is prioritized and consumed over the first special symbol, it is possible to exclude “6 rounds probable big hit 2” from the winning type for the second special symbol. In particular, the “high probability time reduction state” is less likely to correspond to “6 rounds probable big hit 2”, so that there is an advantage that the player can be less annoyed accordingly.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In this embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 15 rounds probable big hit or 6 rounds probable big hit 1, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to control the big hit or “reach effect” is performed. Controls to make a big hit without generating. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined. If the hit pattern is a 15 round probability variation big hit or 6 round probability variation big hit 1, Either variation pattern is selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state / normal interval).
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round probability variation big hit or a 6-round probability variation big hit 1 is won in a low probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state / first interval and second interval).
This selection table is a table used when a 15 round probability variation big hit or a 6 round probability variation big hit 1 is won in the first interval and the second interval in the high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. In the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “255 (FFH)” are provided, and the “variation pattern number” of each “comparison value” is set. “33” to “35” are assigned.

  The variation pattern numbers “33” to “35” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit without the reach effect. That is, when the variation pattern numbers “33” to “35” are selected, the reach effect is not performed, so that the big hit is achieved with a relatively short variation time (about 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “34” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state / third section).
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round probability variation big hit or a 6-round probability variation big hit 1 is won in the third section in a high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
Here, the variation pattern at the time of winning in the third section in the high probability time shortened state is the same variation pattern (variation time is about 12.5 seconds, for example) in order to secure a dramatic measure for a big hit. This selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern 51).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “51” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The variation pattern 51 per non-reach is a variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state / fourth section).
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round probability variation big hit or a 6-round probability variation big hit 1 is won in the fourth interval in a high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
Here, the variation pattern at the time of winning in the fourth section in the high probability time shortened state is the same variation pattern (variation time is about 22.0 seconds, for example) in order to secure the stage for the player participation type production. This selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (variation pattern 71 per non-reach).

  Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 selects “71” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random value. The variation pattern 51 per non-reach is a variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state / special high probability section).
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round probability variation big hit or a 6-round probability variation big hit 1 is won in a special high probability section in a high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “93” to “100” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “93” to “100” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. That is, when the variation pattern numbers “93” to “100” are selected, a reach effect is performed, so that a big hit is obtained with a relatively long variation time (for example, 60 seconds or more).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “94” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state / short time medium / low probability interval).
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round probability variation big hit or a 6-round probability variation big hit 1 is won in the short-time middle-low probability section in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “113” to “120” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “113” to “120” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. That is, when the variation pattern numbers “113” to “120” are selected, a reach effect is performed, so that a big hit is obtained with a relatively long variation time (for example, 60 seconds or more).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “114” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “6 round probability variation symbol 1”, “6 round probability variation symbol 2” or “15 round probability variation symbol”. In either case, the value (01H) of the probability variation function activation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “6 round probability variation symbol 1”, “6 round probability variation symbol 2” or “15 round probability variation symbol”. If it is, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 17: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 18). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 18), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process (second lottery element priority consumption means). Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 18).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 17) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.
Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “15 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “15 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2”, a value representing “6 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “15 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “15 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “6 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes section management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for managing various sections such as a normal section, a first section, a second section, a third section, a special high probability section, a short time medium / low probability section, and the like. The contents of the section management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In the present embodiment, since the so-called frequency cut probability changing function is employed, when shifting to the “high probability state” and “time reduction state”, the frequency cut counter relating to the high probability state has a predetermined numerical value (for example, 8 times). Is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 8 times or 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, the count-off counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 8 times), so that the probability variation function operation flag is reset after the special symbol fluctuates 8 times after the special game. In addition, since the turn-off counter related to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 8 times or 100 times), the time shortening function operation flag is reset after the special symbol changes 8 times or 100 times after the special game . Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Section management processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the section management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than “0”. Here, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is a variable that is referred to when shifting each section managed by the main control CPU 72. Note that the setting of the variation pattern selection counter value is performed in an interval setting process (FIG. 43) described later.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (step S4660: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, for example, when the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4660: No), the main control CPU 72 Return to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 35).
The case where the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” means that the user is staying in the normal section (normal mode).

  Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (decrementing by 1) the variation pattern selection counter value.

Step S4664: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “92”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “92” (step S4664: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4666. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “92” (step S4664: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S4666.

  Step S4666: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for updating the section management status. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the short, medium, and low probability section in the section management status. As a result, the fluctuation state in the special high probability section ends, and the transition to the fluctuation in the short time medium / low probability section is made.

Step S4668: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state (step S4668: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4670. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state (step S4668: No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4682.

Step S4670: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “5”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “5” (step S4670: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4672. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “5” (step S4670: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S4672.

  Step S4672: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for updating the section management status. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the second section in the section management status. As a result, the fluctuation state in the first section ends, and the transition to the fluctuation in the second section occurs.

Step S4674: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “4”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “4” (step S4674: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4676. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “4” (step S4674: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S4676.

  Step S4676: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for updating the section management status. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the third section in the section management status. As a result, the fluctuation state in the second section is completed, and the movement in the third section is shifted to.

Step S4678: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “1”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “1” (step S4678: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4680. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “1” (step S4678: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S4680.

  Step S4680: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for updating the section management status. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the fourth section in the section management status. As a result, the fluctuation state in the third section is completed, and the movement in the fourth section is started.

Step S4682: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “0”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4682: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4684. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “0” (step S4682: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S4684.

Step S4684: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for updating the section management status. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the normal section in the section management status. As a result, the fluctuation state in the fourth section and the short-term middle-low probability section ends, and the transition to the fluctuation in the normal section is started.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 35).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38a and the short time state display lamp 38b, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38a. The probability variation state display lamp 38a remains lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. Can be switched to (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38b, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38c and 38d in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38c, 38d based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38c and 38d corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation count status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “15 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing “15 rounds (15R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “6 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38d representing “6 rounds (6R)”.

  In the state display setting process (step S1220), the main control CPU 72 also controls the firing position designation display lamp 38e of the gaming state display device 38. For example, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38e when the special game is being executed or when the time is reduced.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the previous special symbol game process (FIG. 17). The interval time between rounds is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds) for “6 round probability variation 1” and “15 round probability variation”, for example, “6 round probability variation 2”. Is set to about 1 second. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). Specifically, if the large category “15-round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to fifteen. If “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to six. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“5” for 6 times, “14” for 15 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. The main control CPU 72 then executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous special winning opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 39) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that the release at the time of the small hit is that the value of the release timer is set to a short time, and therefore, the main control CPU 72 normally confirms that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5310 before step S5306. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 39). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special prize closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 38). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (6 times or 15 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 39). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 38). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through step S5401 to step S5413 (No) and step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, eight times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In this embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability changer; ST machine). . If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508, but since the probability variation ratio is 100% in the present embodiment, step S5508 is always performed. Executed.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines the number of time reductions (for example, 8 times) according to the winning symbol and the presence or absence of the time reduction state at the time of winning. Or 100 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes section setting processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various sections and setting a variation pattern selection counter value. The contents of the section setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Section setting processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the section setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure. This section setting process is a process that is not executed when a small hit is hit.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning in a time shortening state (high probability time shortening state or low probability time shortening state).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is a winning in the time shortening state (step S5600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5608. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning is the winning in the time shortening state (step S5600: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to either “6 round probability variation symbol 2” or “15 round probability variation symbol”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to either “6 round probability variation 2” or “15 round probability variation” (step S5602: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5608. To do. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the winning symbol this time corresponds to either “6 round probability variation symbol 2” or “15 round probability variation symbol”, that is, “6 round probability variation symbol 1”. If it is confirmed that this is the case (step S5602: NO), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5604.

Step S5604: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the first section in the section management status.
Step S5606: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets “8” to the variation pattern selection counter value. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once.

Step S5608: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the special high probability section in the section management status.
Step S5610: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets “100” to the variation pattern selection counter value. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once.

Through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected variation pattern a normal variation or a special variation (variation pattern regulating means). When the section management status value is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a section management status command reflecting the value. The section management status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the end process (FIG. 42).

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”. Among these, for the left effect symbol, a symbol row is arranged in ascending order of “1” to “9”, and for the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol, the numbers are “9” to “1”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 44 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
44A: For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (a state where the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 44, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (in broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are added in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “6 rounds probable big hit 1” or “15 rounds probable big hit” instead of “out of”, the corresponding mode (for example, blue display color or red display color) is used. The fourth symbol Z1, Z2 is stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
44 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
44 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 44, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 44, the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, so that three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 44 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is changed. There is also a pattern in which the effect design to be expressed stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 44: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 45 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning). The following production examples show production examples in cases other than the countdown zone, which will be described later, corresponding to “6-round probability variation 1” and “15 round probability variation symbols”. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach effect, after the first special symbol display device 34 (or the second special symbol display device 35 may be used), the first special symbol is “6 rounds probable big hit 1 ”Or“ 15 rounds probable big hit ”(for example, 7-segment LED“ self ”,“ yo ”,“ mouth ”,“ 巳 ”,“ F ”,“ E ”,“ L ”,“ Γ ”, etc.) It is executed until the stop display is made (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 45, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 45 (A): The left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol columns are vertically displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol). The variable display effect is started by scrolling in a direction (for example, from top to bottom).

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
In FIG. 45 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 45C, after the first stage aspect of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 45 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 45 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect design representing the number “4” is stopped at the upper left position of the screen, and the effect design representing the number “5” is stopped at the lower left position.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
45 (E): Then, following the left effect design, for example, the change display of the right effect design is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “4” is stopped at the lower right position, and the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the upper right position of the screen. There are two types of reach states on the diagonal line (on two diagonal lines): the numbers “4” — “fluctuating” — “4” and “5” — “fluctuating” — “5”. On the screen, an image that emphasizes two diagonal lines that are in a reach state on a diagonal line is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this example, since there are two candidates for the medium effect symbol, the numbers “4” and “5” (so-called double reach, double template), it is a highly anticipated reach state. In this embodiment, even if the number “4” is aligned or the number “5” is aligned, the probability variation is a big hit. Can be held by a person.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, “4” and “5”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 45 (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, a notice effect after the occurrence of reach (first time) is performed in which images representing “heart” figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 45 (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “8” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also intended to suggest (imply) or remind the player that the number “4” or “5” is a “hit” if it remains unerased to the end. Done in If the number “3” is erased and “4” remains in front of the screen, it is “normal (non-probable change) big hit”, but if the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen. It means “probable big hit”, and if the number “5” is deleted, it means “out of place”. In this case, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, the images “2”, “3”, “4”,... Are deleted in order, and as the numbers “4” and “5” approach, Tension and expectation will also increase. After this, for example, if the number up to “3” is erased on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player's tension increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 45 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a close-up, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be a smile) The notice effect (second time) is performed after the occurrence of reach (cut-in effect). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 3 ”is erased, then the possibility of a big hit of“ 4 ”-“ 4 ”-“ 4 ”increases” ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “It will be a big hit of 5”. Therefore, by causing the character image to appear at such a timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 45 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this example, since the winning symbol internally corresponds to “6 rounds probable big hit 1”, the effect symbol representing the odd number “5” in the effect is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen.

  In FIG. 45 (J): For example, a confirmed stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the confirmed stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. Further, in this case, the fourth symbol Z1 or the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “6 round probability variation big hit 1”.

  In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is also performed in a manner of deviation in the same manner. Execution means). In this case, by displaying numbers “3” and “6” other than “4” and “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Director during big role]
FIG. 46 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game when “6 round probability variation 1” is applicable.

[At the start of one round]
46 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game (for example, Female character) is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “5”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) during the big hit game, the player is told that “the game is in a big hit promising big hit game” to the player. Can communicate.

[6 rounds]
(B) in FIG. 46: After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final six rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND6” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In addition, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (number “5”) as the above “remaining eye” is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 46, (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “entering a countdown zone” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, it is possible to convey that a special zone called “countdown zone” is transferred as a privilege after the big hit game ends. When the time reduction state corresponds to “6 round probability variation 1”, the process does not shift to the countdown zone but shifts directly to the fireworks mode described later.

[Director during big role]
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the big-game effect performed during the big hit game when the “15-round probability variation symbol” is met. This big role production is executed when the effect design is stopped and displayed in a combination of three of “7”-“7”-“7” through the reach production.

[1 round]
In FIG. 47 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In the lower left area of the display screen, the characters “Special Bonus” are displayed. Therefore, the player can be informed that the current big hit is a special big hit different from the normal big hit.

[15 rounds]
In FIG. 47 (B): After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when the final 15 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND15” is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 47 (C): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” as a privilege after the big hit game ends. The fireworks mode is a mode in which the high probability time shortening state continues for 8 fluctuations, and the low probability time reduction state continues for 92 fluctuations thereafter.

  In this way, in the case of “15 round probability variation”, the player can not feel the tension due to the transition to the “countdown zone”, but the transition to the “countdown zone” This means that the player shifts to the “fireworks mode” to which the time reduction state is given, so that the player can aim at the next big hit at ease at that time.

[Example of countdown zone production]
48 to 52 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect of the countdown zone. This countdown zone is a zone that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of the normal mode (low probability non-time shortening state) corresponding to “6 round probability variation 1”. The countdown zone is a zone effect (special effect) limited to 8 variations. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 48 (A): The first variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of entering the countdown zone. In the countdown zone, a huge number image is displayed in the center, and the huge number image is displayed in a countdown manner as time passes. Such a countdown effect is executed in such a manner that one number is counted down approximately every second. In addition, in the “countdown zone”, in order not to be conscious of the fluctuation display of the production symbol, the production symbol is executed in a state of being reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“Fluctuation”-“Variation in progress”). "-" Fluctuating ").

  Further, the number of memories related to the lottery element of the first special symbol and the number of memories related to the lottery element of the second special symbol are displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen. In the example shown in the figure, since the first special symbol is displayed as “circle graphic = 1”, it is expressed that there is one memory of the first special symbol. Further, since the second special symbol is displayed as “heart figure = 0”, it is expressed that there is no memory of the second special symbol.

  (B) in FIG. 48: In the countdown zone, a huge number image is displayed in a countdown manner as time passes. In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “59” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from the initial value “60”.

  (C) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “58” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “59”. Since the countdown zone is in a time-saving state, if the player continues to make a right turn, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “lightning small effect” with a weaker notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a huge numerical image emits light. In addition, since the game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a, “Heart figure = 1” is shown at the upper right position of the screen, indicating that the memory of the second special symbol has increased by one.

  (D) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image “57” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “58”.

  (E) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “56” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “57”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak text effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which a hatena mark is displayed around a huge number image. Further, since the game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a, “heart figure = 2” is shown at the upper right position of the screen, which indicates that the memory of the second special symbol has been increased by one.

  FIG. 48 (F): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “55” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “56”.

  FIG. 48 (G): In the example shown in the figure, the number image “54” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “55”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak character effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which one ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed. In addition, since the game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a, “Heart figure = 3” is displayed at the upper right position of the screen, which indicates that the memory of the second special symbol has been increased by one.

  (H) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “53” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “54”.

  (I) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “52” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “53”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak character effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which an enemy character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed. In the above character production, the scenario of the character to be displayed in advance is set, and whenever a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the character is displayed, and when a fixed character (a lantern ghost) appears. The production ends. In addition, since the game ball has entered the lower start winning opening 28a, “heart figure = 4” is shown at the upper right position of the screen, which expresses that the memory of the second special symbol has increased by one.

  (J) in FIG. 48: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “51” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “52”. With regard to “weak character production”, a fixed character (a lantern ghost) has already appeared, so in the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which both the enemy character and the friendly character disappear at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 49 (K): In the example shown in the figure, the number image “50” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “51”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “lightning small effect” with a weaker notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a huge numerical image emits light. At this time, since the second special symbol has already reached the upper limit (four), the display of “heart figure = 4” in the upper right position of the screen is not changed.

  49 (L): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “49” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “50”.

  In FIG. 49 (M): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “48” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “49”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak character effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which one ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  In FIG. 49, (N): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “47” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “48”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak character effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which an enemy character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  In FIG. 49, (O): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “46” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “47”. With regard to “weak character production”, a fixed character (a lantern ghost) has already appeared, so in the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which both the enemy character and the friendly character disappear at the bottom of the screen. At this point in time, the first variation (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game is ended, so that all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5").

  (P) in FIG. 49: The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the countdown zone state by performing the second variation display after the end of the big hit game. In the example shown in the figure, the number image “45” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “46”. In the present embodiment, since the change of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol, one memory corresponding to the second special symbol is digested in the illustrated example, and the upper right position of the screen is displayed. Is also updated to “Heart figure = 3”.

  In FIG. 49 (Q): Since the second change (during non-winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("8"-"9"-"3 "). From the start of the second change after the end of the big hit game to the end of the change, a huge number image is counted down from “45” to “31” one by one, and during that time, a game ball is placed in the lower start winning opening 28a. When a player enters the ball, a strength-specific notice effect is executed each time. Further, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the memory corresponding to the second special symbol increases by one, so that the display of the upper right position of the screen is also displayed as “heart figure = 4”.

  In FIG. 49 (R): The third variation display after the end of the big hit game is performed, so that the effect symbol variation display is performed in the countdown zone state. In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “30” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “31”. In the example shown in the figure, one memory corresponding to the second special symbol is digested, and the display at the upper right position of the screen is also updated to “heart figure = 3”.

  In FIG. 49 (S): Since the third change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("2"-"2"-"5 "). From the start of the third change after the end of the big hit game to the end of the change, a huge number image is counted down from “30” to “16” one by one, and during that time the game ball is placed in the lower start winning opening 28a When a player enters the ball, a strength-specific notice effect is executed each time. Further, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the memory corresponding to the second special symbol increases by one, so that the display of the upper right position of the screen is also displayed as “heart figure = 4”.

  In FIG. 49 (T): After the big hit game is finished, the fourth variation display is performed, so that the effect symbol variation display is performed in the countdown zone. In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “15” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “16”. In the example shown in the figure, one memory corresponding to the second special symbol is digested, and the display at the upper right position of the screen is also updated to “heart figure = 3”.

  In FIG. 50 (U): The fourth fluctuation display has continued since the end of the big hit game. In the illustrated example, a number image “5” is displayed as a huge number image.

  (V) in FIG. 50: In the example shown in the figure, the number image “4” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “5”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the “lightning medium production” with medium notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which a small lightning is generated around a huge number image is executed. At this time, since the second special symbol has already reached the upper limit (four), the display of “heart figure = 4” in the upper right position of the screen is not changed.

  In FIG. 50, (W): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “3” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “4”.

  In FIG. 50, (X): In the example shown in the figure, the number image “2” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “3”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, “medium-character production” with a middle degree of notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which one surprise mark is displayed around a huge number image. At this time, since the second special symbol has already reached the upper limit (four), the display of “heart figure = 4” in the upper right position of the screen is not changed.

  In FIG. 50 (Y): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “1” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “2”.

  In FIG. 50, (Z): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “0” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “1”. As a result, the player can be informed that the production by the series of countdowns has ended. Then, since the fourth variation (during non-winning) after the big hit game is over, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"2"-"4").

  In FIG. 50, (a): When the fifth change (at the time of non-winning) is started after the end of the big hit game, the liquid crystal screen is blacked out. Since the fifth non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("5"-"1"-"3").

  (B) in FIG. 50: Even if the sixth change (during non-winning) is started after the end of the big hit game, the liquid crystal screen remains blacked out. Since the sixth non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("6"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 50, (c): The liquid crystal screen remains blacked out even if the seventh change (when not winning) is started after the end of the big hit game. Since the seventh non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("7"-"1"-"4").

(Door closing effect)
In FIG. 50 (d): When the eighth change is started after the end of the big hit game, doors (襖) appear from both sides of the display screen, and the effect of closing in the center is performed. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by changing the display contents from the previous blackout screen.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 51, (e): The game explanation effect is executed following the door closing effect. In the example shown in the figure, the character information “Strongly press the button!” Is displayed vigorously, thereby prompting the player to continuously press the effect switching button 45.

  Here, in this embodiment, the state where the door is completely closed is set to “0 stage”, and when the door is gradually opened from there, “2 stage”, “3 stage”, “4 stage” and stage of production The state where the door is fully opened is referred to as “five steps”. In the illustrated example, the door is completely closed, so the stage of production is “0 stage”.

  Further, in the lower left area of the display screen, a button image obtained by simplifying the effect switching button 45 is displayed over the door image, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around this button image, a time meter indicating the passage of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, since the time meters of 8 squares are all displayed as colored images, the player can be informed that pressing the effect switching button 45 will be effective for about 8 seconds from now. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  In FIG. 51, it is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to the effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the effect that the left and right doors are opened little by little according to the repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45 is executed.

[Stage progress production (0 stage → 1 stage)]
When a predetermined production execution lottery (stage progression lottery) is won at “0 stage”, one stage of production progresses. In the illustrated example, the stage of production is “one stage”, and the door is slightly open. Moreover, although the hermit character is displayed on the other side of the door, the visibility of the hermit character is not so good because the door is hardly open at this stage.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

[Stage progress effect (1 step → 2 steps)]
In FIG. 51 (g): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. When a predetermined effect execution lottery is won in “one stage”, one stage of effect is advanced. In the illustrated example, the stage of production is “two stages”, and the door is open.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

[Stage progress effect (2 steps-> 3 steps)]
FIG. 51 (h): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. When a predetermined effect execution lottery is won in “two steps”, one step of the effect proceeds. In the example shown in the figure, the stage of production is “three stages”, and the door is still open. When the door opens to this point, the visibility of the hermit's character is improved.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

[Stage progress effect (3 steps-> 4 steps)]
In FIG. 52 (i): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. When a predetermined production execution lottery is won in “3 stages”, one stage of production progresses. In the example shown in the figure, the stage of production is “four stages”, and the door is greatly open. When the door opens to this point, you can see the hermit character completely.

  At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[Stage progress production (4 stages-> 5 stages), success production]
In FIG. 52 (j): When the eighth change after the end of the big hit game corresponds to winning, and when the predetermined effect execution lottery is won, the stage of the stage proceeds to the final “five stages” The effect that the left and right doors are completely opened is executed. Then, a successful performance will be performed in which the hermit's character, which has been stationary until now, begins to move. It should be noted that the predetermined effect execution lottery in “4 stages” has a high probability of winning because the winning probability is set low (details of the winning probabilities will be described later).

  52 (k): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("1"-"1"-"1"). In addition, text information “Successful entry into fireworks mode” is displayed in the center of the screen, and it is possible to instruct the player that the fireworks mode will be entered after the big hit game is over.

[Failure production]
In FIG. 52 (l): When the eighth change after the end of the big hit game corresponds to a non-winning game, the stage of the stage will not progress to “5 stages” no matter how many times the stage switch button 45 is pressed. Eventually, a failure effect is performed in which the left and right doors close.

  In FIG. 52 (m): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("1"-"2"-"5"). In addition, the character information “End of countdown zone” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the player can be informed that the countdown zone has ended. Thereafter, the normal mode is entered.

[Other examples of winning during the final change in the countdown zone]
FIGS. 53 and 54 are continuous diagrams showing other examples of effects at the time of winning in the final change in the countdown zone. In the following example, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the eighth change after the big hit game corresponds to winning and the time of “4 seconds” is set for the success prohibited section.

[Game description production]
53 (A): Here, the eighth fluctuation display after the big hit game is performed, and in the illustrated example, the game explanation effect is executed following the door closing effect.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 8 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 8 seconds.

  In FIG. 53 (B): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to the effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the effect that the left and right doors are opened little by little according to the repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45 is executed.

  Here, the player repeatedly strikes the effect switching button 45 with a certain degree of momentum, and the stage of the stage has progressed to “three stages” at once. When the door opens to this point, the visibility of the hermit's character is improved.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

In FIG. 53 (C): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously.
In the example shown in the figure, the door is greatly open, so the stage of production is “four stages”. When the door opens to this point, you can see the hermit character completely.

At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.
If the time corresponding to the “success prohibited section” is set to “4 seconds”, which is a normal setting, the process proceeds to the “success possible section” from this point. The stage of the production can be advanced to “5 stages” to execute the successful production. However, in the example shown in the figure, the success effect or the like has not been executed yet. The details of the success prohibited section and the success possible section will be described later.

  In FIG. 54 (D): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the example shown in the figure, the door is greatly open from the state in which the door is largely open, and the stage of the production remains in the “four stages” state.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

[Successful production]
In FIG. 54 (E): When the eighth variation after the end of the big hit game corresponds to winning, and when the predetermined effect execution lottery is won, the stage of the stage proceeds to the final “5 stages”. The effect that the left and right doors are completely opened is executed. Then, a successful performance will be performed in which the hermit's character, which has been stationary until now, begins to move.

  54 (F): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("2"-"2"-"2"). In addition, text information “Successful entry into fireworks mode” is displayed in the center of the screen, and it is possible to instruct the player that the fireworks mode will be entered after the big hit game is over.

[Still another example when winning in the final variation of the countdown zone]
FIG.55 and FIG.56 is a continuous figure which shows another example of an effect at the time of winning by the final change of a countdown zone. In the following example, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the eighth variation after the big hit game corresponds to winning and the time of “6 seconds” is set for the success prohibited section.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 55 (A): Here, the eighth fluctuation display after the big hit game is performed, and in the illustrated example, the game explanation effect is executed following the door closing effect.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 8 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 8 seconds.

  55 (B): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to an effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the effect that the left and right doors are opened little by little according to the repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45 is executed.

  In this case, the player repeatedly strikes the effect switching button 45 with a considerable momentum, and the stage of the stage is progressing to “four stages” at once. When the door opens to this point, you can see the hermit character completely.

  At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

(C) in FIG. 55: The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously.
In the illustrated example, the stage of the production remains in the “4 stage” state.

At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.
If the “success prohibition section” is set to “6 seconds”, this time is still a “success prohibition section”. Therefore, no matter how much the player presses the effect switching button 45, the final five steps are performed. The stage of production never progresses.

  In FIG. 56 (D): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the stage of the production remains in the “4 stage” state.

At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.
If the time corresponding to the “success prohibited section” is set to “6 seconds”, which is a special setting, the process shifts to the “success possible section” from this point. The stage of the production can be advanced to “5 stages” to execute the successful production. However, in the example shown in the figure, the success effect or the like has not been executed yet.

[Successful production]
In FIG. 56 (E): When the eighth change after the big hit game is won, and when a predetermined production execution lottery is won, the stage of production proceeds to the final “5 levels”. The effect that the left and right doors are completely opened is executed. Then, a successful performance will be performed in which the hermit's character, which has been stationary until now, begins to move.

  56 (F): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("5"-"5"-"5"). In addition, text information “Successful entry into fireworks mode” is displayed in the center of the screen, and it is possible to instruct the player that the fireworks mode will be entered after the big hit game is over.

[Example of rebirth production with final change in countdown zone]
57 and 58 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect of the revival effect at the final change in the countdown zone.
Here, the revival effect is a case where a player performs a failure effect without executing the press of the effect switch button 45 in spite of a change at the time of winning, or a special winning effect is executed from the beginning. Then, it is a special success effect executed when it is decided. This revival effect is executed as an effect different from the success effect described above after executing an effect that is the same as or similar to the failure effect. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 57 (A): Here, the eighth fluctuation display after the big hit game is performed, and in the illustrated example, the door is greatly open, so the stage of performance is “4 stages” Yes.

  At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

  In FIG. 57 (B): In the situation where the stage of production has progressed to “4 stages”, when the predetermined production execution lottery has not been won, the stage of production has progressed to “4 stages” When the pressing of the switch button 45 is canceled or when it is determined to execute the restoration effect from the beginning, the failure effect that the left and right doors are closed is executed as the effective time of the effect switch button 45 elapses. The Note that when the press of the effect switching button 45 is not executed once from the beginning, the left and right doors remain closed.

  In FIG. 57 (C): The character information “Countdown Zone End” is displayed in the center of the screen, and it is possible to teach the player that the countdown zone has ended as fake information here. . In addition, the production design is maintained in a state of changing (“changed” − “changed” − “changed”).

  58 (D): In the example shown in the figure, the character information “Countdown zone end” is continuously displayed. At this time, a cracked image is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen. As a specific effect form, a bullet is fired from the front of the liquid crystal screen, the bullet penetrates the liquid crystal screen, and an effect is performed as if a hole has opened in the liquid crystal screen.

  (E) in FIG. 58: Then, an effect is implemented in which cracks (cracks) entering radially centering on the penetrating hole gradually spread over the entire liquid crystal screen.

  58 (F): Eventually, an effect is produced in which the display screen is shattered by the radially expanding cracks, and an effect in which glass fragments are shattered and piled up in the lower area of the liquid crystal screen is executed. . At the same time, a performance in which the hermit character appears with joy is performed. In this case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("9"-"9"-"9"). After that, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is finished, the fireworks mode is entered.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the revival effect may be executed while showing it as a failure effect. Therefore, even if the failure effect is executed once, there is still a possibility of reversing from there. The player's sense of expectation for the player-participation type production can be maintained until the end.

  Further, in this embodiment, the player participation type effect is performed using the door image, and the success effect and the failure effect are executed depending on the degree of opening of the door image. It can be a type production.

[Example of winning during the countdown zone before the countdown ends]
FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effects when winning is made during the countdown effect executed in the countdown zone. In the following example, an example of an effect in the case of winning in the fourth variation after the big hit game will be described.

  In FIG. 59, (A): Here, the fourth variation display after the big hit game is performed, and in the example shown, a number image of “15” is displayed as a huge number image.

  In FIG. 59, (B): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “14” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “15”.

  In FIG. 59, (C): In the example shown in the figure, the number image “13” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “14”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “lightning small effect” with a weaker notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a huge numerical image emits light.

  In FIG. 59, (D): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “12” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “13”.

  In FIG. 59, (E): In the illustrated example, the number image of “11” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “12”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “weak text effect” with a low notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which a hatena mark is displayed around a huge number image.

  In FIG. 59, (F): Up to this point, the user has stayed in the notice lottery zone with a low notice strength. Details of the notice lottery zone will be described later. In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “10” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “11”.

  In FIG. 59, (G): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “9” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “10”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, “medium character effect” having a medium notification reliability is executed as the notification effect according to strength. Specifically, an effect in which one ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  (H) in FIG. 59: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “8” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “9”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, “medium character effect” having a medium notification reliability is executed as the notification effect according to strength. Specifically, an effect in which one additional ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  (I) in FIG. 59: In the example shown in the figure, the number image “7” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “8”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, “medium character effect” having a medium notification reliability is executed as the notification effect according to strength. Specifically, an effect in which an enemy character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  (J) in FIG. 59: In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “6” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “7”. Regarding the “middle character effect”, since a fixed character (a lantern ghost) has already appeared, an effect is executed in which the enemy character and two ally characters disappear together at the bottom of the screen in the illustrated example.

Further, at this time, the execution condition of the entrance opportunity winning effect is assumed to be satisfied.
Here, the winning opportunity winning effect is a predetermined random lottery when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a while the special symbol changes while the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery. This is an effect that teaches the player that the winning result is obtained in the special symbol lottery on the condition that it is won.

  If it does so, the production | presentation for the display of the production | presentation symbol at the time of winning will be performed from this time. In the example shown in the figure, a huge number image is displayed a little smaller than the conventional display mode, and the huge number image is displayed a little rotated. In addition, a spiral image is displayed around the huge number image, and an effect is performed in which the huge number image is sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  In FIG. 60 (K): Up to this point, the user has stayed in the notice lottery zone with medium notice strength, but from here it is assumed that the player has entered the notice lottery zone with strong notice intensity. In the illustrated example, the number image of “5” is displayed by counting down the number image of the center by one from “6”. In addition, the number image “5” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip on the outer peripheral side of the spiral image is also gradually extended and displayed.

  In FIG. 60, (L): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “4” is displayed because the number image of the center is counted down from “5” by one. In addition, the numeral image “4” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip of the spiral image on the outer peripheral side is also gradually extended. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the figure, “lightning bolt production” having a high degree of notice reliability is executed as the notice effect according to strength. Specifically, an effect in which a huge lightning strikes in the center of the screen is performed.

  In FIG. 60, (M): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “3” is displayed because the number image at the center is counted down from “4” by one. In addition, the numeral image “3” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip on the outer peripheral side of the spiral image is also gradually extended and displayed. At this time, the numeral image “3” is displayed so small that it is hardly visible. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” with a high degree of prioritization reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which three surprise marks are displayed around a huge number image is executed.

  In FIG. 60 (N): An effect is produced in which all effect symbols pop out from the back side to the near side. In this case, the effect symbols are enlarged and displayed so that not all the three effect symbols can be displayed.

  In FIG. 60 (O): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes.

  In FIG. 60 (P): After this, for example, using the waiting time for opening the variable winning device 30, an explanation effect of the mode to be transferred after the end of the big hit game is executed. In the illustrated example, character information “fireworks mode” is displayed.

  In FIG. 60 (Q): Character information “Successful entry!” Is displayed following the previous character information. Accordingly, it is possible to transmit to the player that the game will shift to the “fireworks mode” after the big hit game is over.

  In FIG. 60 (R): After this, the player enters a 15-round jackpot game, and on the screen, a big-game effect corresponding to the 15-round jackpot is executed.

[Example of winning during the countdown zone before the countdown ends]
61 and 62 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the special light emission effect executed during the countdown effect.
Here, the special light-emitting effect is a case where a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a during the winning variation in the countdown effect, and when a predetermined random number lottery is won, the mode shifts to the fireworks mode in the future. This is a special time shortening state transition teaching effect that teaches the player what to do. And this special light emission effect is performed by lighting LED built in the light-emitting body 41. FIG. In the following example, an example of an effect in the case of winning in the second change after the big hit game will be described.

  In FIG. 61, (A): Here, the second variation display after the big hit game is performed, and in the example shown, a number image of “45” is displayed as a huge number image. At this time, the light emitter 41 has not yet emitted light.

  In FIG. 61, (B): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “44” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “45”.

  In FIG. 61, (C): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “43” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “44”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, “medium-character production” with a middle degree of notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which one surprise mark is displayed around a huge number image.

  In FIG. 61, (D): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “42” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “43”.

  In FIG. 61, (E): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “41” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “42”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the “lightning medium production” with medium notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which a small lightning is generated around a huge number image is executed.

  In FIG. 61, (F): Up to this point, the user has stayed in the notice lottery zone with a low notice strength. Details of the notice lottery zone will be described later. In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “40” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “41”.

  In FIG. 61, (G): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “39” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “40”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” having a high notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which one ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  In FIG. 61, (H): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “38” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “39”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” having a high notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which one additional ally character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

  Then, it is assumed that the performance execution condition of the special light emission effect is satisfied by the entrance of the game ball this time. Then, the spade-shaped light emitter 41 enters a light emitting state. With such a special light-emitting effect, it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation and that the game will be switched to the fireworks mode after the end of the big hit game, so that the player is the player when the light-emitting body 41 emits light. Can watch the game afterwards with peace of mind.

  In FIG. 61, (I): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “37” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “38”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” having a high notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which one additional ally character appears from the lower part of the screen is executed, and an effect in which all three ally characters are aligned is executed.

  In FIG. 61, (J): In the example shown in the figure, the number image of “36” is displayed by counting down one huge number image from “37”. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” having a high notice reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which an enemy character appears from the bottom of the screen is executed.

Further, at this time, the execution condition of the entrance opportunity winning effect is assumed to be satisfied.
If it does so, the production | presentation for the display of the production | presentation symbol at the time of winning will be performed from this time. In the example shown in the figure, a huge number image is displayed a little smaller than the conventional display mode, and the huge number image is displayed a little rotated. In addition, a spiral image is displayed around the huge number image, and an effect is performed in which the huge number image is sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  FIG. 62 (K): Up to this point, the user has stayed in the notice lottery zone having the medium notice strength. However, from here, it is assumed that the player enters the notice lottery zone having the strong notice intensity. In the example shown in the figure, the number image at the center is counted down by one from “36”, so that the number image of “35” is displayed. In addition, the numerical image “35” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip on the outer peripheral side of the spiral image is also gradually extended. In addition, regarding “strong character production”, a fixed character (a lantern ghost) has already appeared, so in the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which both the enemy character and the three friendly characters disappear at the bottom of the screen. .

  62 (L): In the example shown in the figure, the number image at the center is counted down by one from “35”, so that the number image at “34” is displayed. In addition, the numeral image “34” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip on the outer peripheral side of the spiral image is gradually extended and displayed. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the figure, “lightning bolt production” having a high degree of notice reliability is executed as the notice effect according to strength. Specifically, an effect in which a huge lightning strikes in the center of the screen is performed.

  In FIG. 62, (M): In the example shown in the figure, the number image at the center is counted down by one from “34”, so that the number image at “33” is displayed. In addition, the numeral image “33” is displayed smaller and rotated, and the tip on the outer peripheral side of the spiral image is also gradually extended. At this time, the numeral image “33” is displayed so small that it is hardly visible. Here, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the lower start winning port 28a of the variable start winning device 28. Then, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the notice effect by strength is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, a “strong character effect” with a high degree of prioritization reliability is executed as the notice effect by strength. Specifically, an effect in which three surprise marks are displayed around a huge number image is executed.

  In FIG. 62 (N): An effect is produced in which all effect symbols pop out from the back side to the near side. In this case, the effect symbols are enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed ("1"-"1"-"1").

  In FIG. 62 (O): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes ("1"-"1"-"1").

In FIG. 62 (P): After this, for example, using the opening waiting time of the variable winning device 30, the explanation effect of the mode to be shifted to after the end of the big hit game is executed. In the illustrated example, character information “fireworks mode” is displayed.
Further, in the liquid crystal screen, an effect is performed as if light rays were generated at a stroke from the position of the spade-shaped light emitter 41.

  In FIG. 62 (Q): Character information “Successful entry!” Is displayed following the previous character information. Accordingly, it is possible to transmit to the player that the game will shift to the “fireworks mode” after the big hit game is over. Further, in the liquid crystal screen, an effect as if light rays are generated at a stretch from the position of the spade-shaped light emitter 41 is continuously executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied that “the player has successfully entered the fireworks mode”.

  In FIG. 62 (R): After that, a 6-round big hit game is entered, and a big-bodied effect corresponding to the 6 round big hit is executed on the screen.

[Examples of directing after the countdown in the countdown zone]
FIG. 63 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect in the case of winning after the countdown effect executed in the countdown zone is completed. In the following example, a description will be given of an effect example in the case of winning at the sixth change after the big hit game.

  In FIG. 63 (A): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed because the fourth change (when not winning) after the big hit game ends (“2”-“2”-“4”) . In the example shown in the figure, a numeric image “0” is displayed as a huge numeric image. At this point, the countdown effect in the countdown zone ends.

  (B) in FIG. 63: When the fifth change (when not winning) is started after the big hit game is finished, the liquid crystal screen is blacked out. Since the fifth non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("6"-"5"-"4").

  In FIG. 63, (C): Even if the sixth change (at the time of winning) is started after the end of the big hit game, the liquid crystal screen remains blacked out. However, since the current variation is a variation at the time of winning, an effect is performed in which white characters appear one by one in the blacked-out screen. Specifically, the characters “HANABI MODE TO MENU” are displayed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a series of countdown effects may have been completed, but may be a big hit due to reverse rotation.

  In FIG. 63 (D): After all the above white characters have been displayed, the effect that the movable body 40f completely falls to the central portion of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. At this time, an image showing a state where lightning or explosion has occurred is also displayed as a background image.

  In FIG. 63 (E): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display ("3"-"3"-"3").

[Example of fireworks mode]
FIG. 64 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect in the fireworks mode. This fireworks mode corresponds to “15 round probability variation symbol” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2” in the normal mode, or “15 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “ This mode is shifted to the case of “6 round probability variation 2”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 64 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks mode” state. The background image of the fireworks mode is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 64 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 64: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. The “fireworks mode” is a mode that continues only for 100 fluctuations, and the first 8 fluctuations are in a high probability time shortening state, and the remaining 92 fluctuations are in a low probability time shortening state. In the illustrated example, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol is shown. However, since the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated in the time shortening state, the game ball is launched. Unless the game is stopped, the variation display of the second and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game is often the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol.

  Here, regarding the jackpot effect in the fireworks mode, it may be a big hit through each reach effect described above, but a specific reach effect shortened from each reach effect described above (for example, a specific character is displayed gradually larger). It is also possible to make a big hit through a production that will be a big hit if it is displayed as a big shot to the maximum extent.

[Example of production when winning 6 rounds probable symbol 2]
FIG.65 and FIG.66 is a continuous diagram which shows the example of an effect performed when it corresponds to "6 rounds probable variation 2" in normal mode, and the example of a mode transition effect.

  This effect example represents an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect using an effect symbol. Among these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from when the special symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. In addition, in the following description, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the matter which is common in the production example mentioned above.

[Before starting variable display production]
In FIG. 65, (A): A row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect design is stopped and displayed with a combination of numbers “4”-“6”-“7”.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 65, (B): The variable display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Left design stop]
(C) in FIG. 65: The left effect design representing the number “1” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Right production symbol stop]
(D) in FIG. 65: The right effect design representing the number “5” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 65: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. However, here, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Therefore, the stop display effect is performed in a mode using the special effect symbol for the medium effect symbol.

  In the example shown in the figure, a special effect design having the characters “fireworks” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. By stopping the special effect design as the medium effect design as in this example, it is possible to teach (suggest) to the player that there is a possibility of having hit some sort. In addition, in the case of “6 round probability variation 2”, instead of stopping such a special effect design, the effect design may be stopped and displayed in a specific arrangement order (chance, order, etc.). .

  Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color) corresponding to “6 round probability variation symbol 2”. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally.

[Example of mode transition effect]
When the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 is a big hit, a mode transition effect is executed. This mode transition effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the big hit of the above “6 round probability variation 2” occurs.

(Door closing effect)
66 (F): For example, if the background image so far is in the “normal mode” shown in FIG. 65 (B), the display screen is displayed during the 6 round probability variation big hit game (while the high speed release operation is being executed). Doors (襖) appear from both sides of the door, and a stunning closing effect is performed at the center. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
66 (G): Next, the closed door quickly moves to the left and right of the display screen, and an effect (door opening effect) representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition effect]
In FIG. 66 (H): When the door is opened, for example, a background image corresponding to the “high probability state” is displayed on the full screen. In this example, for example, a scene in which a female character is looking up at fireworks is produced along with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”, and character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed.

[Direction in high probability state]
In FIG. 66, (I): When the next variation display effect is started, the background image is already fixed in the “fireworks mode” at this time, so the current variation display effect is in the “firework mode”. Is recognized by the player. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the current internal state is the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”.

  In addition, when winning the “6 round probabilistic variation 2” in this way, not only the high probability state but also the time shortening state (so-called sudden probability change), the game after this In this case, it is easy to obtain an internal lottery opportunity using the second special symbol.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, segment-specific effect, big-busy effect, countdown zone effect, intensity-specific notice effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control processes. .

[Production control processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes a command reception process (step S400), a notice strength determination process at the time of entering the lower start winning opening (step S400a), a notice effect prohibition section setting process (step S400b), an operation memory effect management process (step S401), An effect symbol management process (step S402), a display output process (step S404), a lamp drive process (step S406), an acoustic drive process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). The configuration includes a subroutine group. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a section management status command, an upper start winning opening entering command, a lower starting winning opening entering command, and the like.

  Step S400a: In the lower start winning opening entry notice strength determination process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the notice intensity related to the notice effect classified by strength to be executed when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. Is executed (section strength determining means). Here, the notice effect according to strength is an effect that suggests the execution timing of the entry opportunity winning effect, and specifically, the stronger notice effect as the near symbol displayable section where the entry opportunity winning effect can be executed is approached. (Notification effect with high notification reliability) is executed. The details of the notice strength determination process at the time of entering the lower start winning opening will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S400b: In the notice effect prohibition section setting process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process related to the notice effect prohibition section that is executed when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. The content of the notice effect prohibited section setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, the light emitter 41, and the like (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal. The details of the lamp driving process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  In this acoustic drive process, the winning sound notice effect in the countdown zone is managed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes an instruction to generate a winning sound to the acoustic drive circuit 134 when the lower start winning opening entry command is received during the countdown zone. However, even when the lower start winning opening entry command is received, if it is not possible to confirm that the winning sound announcement effect execution executable flag is set to ON, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound drive circuit 134 to The instruction to generate the winning sound is not executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the winning sound announcement effect being executed too frequently. When the winning sound notice effect is executed, the effect control CPU 126 sets the winning sound notice effect executable flag to OFF.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1.

[Notice strength determination process when entering the lower start prize opening]
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the notice strength determination process at the time of entering the lower start winning opening. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S422: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect command when the working memory number is increased, the effect command when the action memory number is decreased, and the like, and confirms whether or not the memory number of the second special symbol is less than the maximum value. At this time, if the number of memories of the second special symbol is less than the maximum value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S424. On the other hand, if the number of memories of the second special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

  As described above, the reason for branching the determination based on the number of memories of the second special symbol, rather than branching the determination based on whether or not the gaming state is in the countdown zone, is that the normal mode or the big hit This is because the memory of the second special symbol may increase during the game, and the memory may be consumed to execute a variable display effect in the countdown zone.

Step S424: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the second special symbol scenario determination table stored in the RAM 130.
Step S426: The effect control CPU 126 determines a scenario to be used for the notice effect according to strength by lottery while referring to the second special symbol scenario determination table. The second special symbol scenario determination table and the scenario lottery method will be described later.

  Step S428: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the determined scenario can be set. For example, if the determined scenario is a scenario that spans three sections, but only two sections can be secured in the variation at the time of winning, it is determined that the determined scenario cannot be set. On the other hand, if the determined scenario is a scenario that spans three sections, and the three sections can be secured in the change at the time of winning, it is determined that the determined scenario can be set.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the determined scenario can be set (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S432. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the determined scenario can be set (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S430.

  Step S430: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previously determined advance change (non-winning change before the change at the time of winning) can be overwritten. For example, when the change executed before the change at the time of winning is already started, it is determined that overwriting is impossible. On the other hand, if the change executed before the change at the time of winning is not yet started, it is determined that overwriting is possible.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous change notice strength can be overwritten (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S433. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the previous change notice level can be overwritten (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S436.

  Step S432: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process for setting the notice strength based on the selected scenario. Since the selected scenario stores information related to the warning intensity, the effect control CPU 126 stores information related to the warning intensity in the warning intensity information storage area (strength information storage means). The notice intensity information storage area is a storage area having a storage area for four variations, and is formed in the RAM 130. Further, in the notice strength information storage area, information (initial value) corresponding to the lowest strength is stored in advance as information concerning the notice strength. The storage location of the notice strength is determined based on the value of the scenario setting number counter.

  Here, the scenario setting number counter is a variable indicating the number of scenario settings, and is stored in the RAM 130. The initial value of the scenario setting number counter is “1” and is incremented every time a scenario is set once. For example, if the scenario setting number counter value is “1”, the notice strength is set in the first storage area of the notice strength information storage area, and if the scenario setting number counter value is “2”, the notice strength information The notice strength is set in the second storage area of the storage area. If the scenario setting number counter value is “3”, the notice strength is set in the third storage area of the notice strength information storage area, and if the scenario setting number counter value is “4”, the notice strength information storage area The notice strength is set in the fourth storage area. Thus, the scenario setting number counter value corresponds to each storage area of the notice strength information storage area, and when the scenario setting number counter value is updated to “5”, there is a corresponding storage area. No notice strength value is set. The scenario setting number counter is reset to “1” when the countdown zone ends, and the content of the notice strength information storage area is reset to the initial value (default) when the countdown zone ends.

Step S433: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of overwriting the notice strength of the part that cannot be stored due to the change to the part corresponding to the previous change based on the selected scenario.
Step S434: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the remaining notice strength based on the selected scenario. By these processes, even if it is not possible to determine the notice strength based on the scenario selected within one change, the notice strength is determined based on the scenario selected across a plurality of changes. be able to.

  Step S436: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the notice strength based on the scenario excluding the portion that cannot be overwritten. This avoids the process of determining the warning intensity based on the contents of all the parts included in the selected scenario, and determines the warning intensity of the fluctuation except for parts corresponding to the warning intensity that cannot be changed. be able to.

When any one of step S432, step S434, or step S436 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S438.
Step S438: The effect control CPU 126 increments the scenario setting number counter.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

[Preliminary production prohibited section setting process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the notice effect prohibited section setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S440: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S442, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

  Step S442: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than 5. The confirmation of the number of changes after the special game can be realized by counting the number of changes of the special symbol after the special game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S444. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67). The reason why the following processing is executed only when the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 is that, after the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 5, the winning sound announcement effect or the strength-specific notice effect is not executed. Because.

  Step S444: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning sound notice effect prohibition timer countdown process. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 counts down the winning sound notice effect prohibition timer set in advance as “the time from the first winning sound notice effect being executed until the next winning sound notice effect is allowed to be executed”. Run. Specifically, when this module is called for the first time, the effect control CPU 126 sets an initial value (for example, about 1 second) as the value of the winning sound notice effect prohibition timer. The control CPU 126 decrements the value of the set winning sound advance notice prohibition timer.

  Step S446: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the winning sound notice effect prohibition timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the timer value has not yet become 0 or less (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute the next step S448. On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 or less (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes the next step S448.

  Step S448: The effect control CPU 126 sets the winning sound notice effect executable flag to ON. Therefore, before the timer value becomes 0, execution of the next winning sound notice effect can be prohibited. After the timer value becomes 0, the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. As a result, a winning sound notice effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the winning sound announcement effect is excessively executed.

  Step S450: The effect control CPU 126 executes a strength-specific notice effect prohibition timer countdown process. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a countdown of the intensity-specific notice effect prohibition timer that is set in advance as “time from when the intensity-specific notice effect is executed until the next intensity-specific notice effect is allowed”. . Specifically, when this module is called for the first time, the effect control CPU 126 sets an initial value (for example, about 2 seconds) as the value of the strength-specific notice effect prohibition timer. The control CPU 126 decrements the value of the preset notice effect prohibition timer classified by intensity.

  Step S452: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the intensity-specific notice effect prohibition timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the timer value is not yet 0 or less (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute the next step S454. On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 or less (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes the next step S454.

Step S454: The effect control CPU 126 sets the strength-specific notice effect executable flag to ON. For this reason, before the timer value becomes 0, it is possible to prohibit execution of the next notice effect according to strength. After the timer value becomes 0, the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. As a result, a notice effect according to strength can be executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the notice effect according to strength is excessively executed.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the countdown zone, an effect that increases the display of the number of memories corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect in which the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are erased or slid. In the countdown zone, an effect for reducing the display of the number of memories corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 17) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach notice notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). In addition, when it corresponds to 6 round probability variation big hit 2, the stop display effect is executed in a manner in which the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to the loss at the small hit.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 15 rounds probable big hit or 1 in 6 rounds probable big hit, the production control CPU 126 selects the 15th and 6th round prominent production patterns as the production contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and uses them as the production display control device 144. (Display control CPU 146) is instructed. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses. On the other hand, when the 6 round probability variation big hit 2 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 126 selects a special effect pattern (mode transition effect pattern) as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and this is selected as the effect display control device 144 (display control). CPU146) is instructed.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 67) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 67). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S603.

  Step S603: The effect control CPU 126 executes a change start notice strength determination process (section strength determination means). The change start notice strength determination process executes a process of determining the notice strength corresponding to the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, since the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is preferentially used, similarly to determining the notice strength when the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored. If the notice strength is determined when the first lottery element corresponding to the first special symbol is stored, and the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored after that, the first special symbol is stored. The notification strength determination process may be wasted.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the first special symbol, the notice strength is determined when the change is started (immediately before the start of the change). A notice strength determination process suitable for symbol priority digestion can be realized. The content of the change start notice strength determination process will be described later with reference to another drawing.
Then, when the change start notice strength determination process is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 71), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Predicting strength determination process at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a change start notice strength determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S620: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current variation is a variation of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation based on a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S622 and cannot confirm that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 72).

  Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S624, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 72).

  Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than 5. The confirmation of the number of changes after the special game can be realized by counting the number of changes of the special symbol after the special game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S626. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of changes after special game is less than 5 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-process (FIG. 72). The reason why the following processing is executed only when the number of fluctuations after special game is less than 5 is that the notice effect according to strength is not executed after the number of fluctuations after special game reaches 5.

Step S626: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the first special symbol scenario determination table stored in the RAM 130.
Step S628: The effect control CPU 126 determines a scenario to be used for the strength-specific notice effect while referring to the first special symbol scenario determination table. However, since the first special symbol scenario determination table is a table in which one scenario is selected in a limited manner, the effect control CPU 126 determines the basic scenario (scenario 1) which is the one scenario. The first special symbol scenario determination table and the scenario determination method will be described later.

Step S630: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process for setting the notice strength based on the determined scenario. The method of setting the notice strength is as described in the previous step S432.
Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 increments the scenario setting number counter.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 72).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S804.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes special big hit effect pattern selection processing (special effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The type of effect symbol determined here constitutes a “hit combination”.

  In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the stay section in the countdown zone. The effect control CPU 126 can confirm the stay section by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the section management status command. Details of the special big hit effect pattern selection process will be described later.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The type of effect symbol determined here constitutes a “hit combination”. In this process, the winning pattern is selected in the low probability state (normal section), so that the effect pattern that is a big hit after the reach effect is selected.
And after finishing the process of either step S802 or step S804, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 72).

[Special big hit production pattern selection process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special big hit effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay section is the first section or the second section. The stay period can be confirmed by the section management status command stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay section is the first section or the second section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814, and the stay section is neither the first section nor the second section. When confirmed (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S812.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay section is the third section.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay section is the third section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S816. When it is confirmed that the stay section is not the third section (No), the effect control CPU 126 is Step S818 is executed.

  Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first section or second section big hit effect pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as FIG. 60) to be won during the countdown of the countdown zone is executed.

  Here, when winning in the 1st section or the 2nd section of the countdown zone (from the 1st to the 4th variation), the variation time at the time of winning is selected from three types: “10 seconds” “15 seconds” “20 seconds” (Variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, “35”). For this reason, at the time when this process is executed, the winning symbol display timing (timing for displaying the effect symbol in the winning manner) is temporarily set as the remaining 2 seconds of the fluctuation time.

  For example, if the variation time at the time of winning is “10 seconds”, an effect pattern in which the effect symbols are displayed in a winning manner when “8 seconds” has elapsed is selected. However, due to the relationship with the winning symbol displayable section, the effect symbol may be displayed in the winning mode before “8 seconds” elapses. In such a case, the effect pattern set temporarily is the effect symbol. It is changed in the process during change (FIG. 81), and the effect design is displayed in a winning manner in advance.

  Step S816: The effect control CPU 126 executes a third section big hit effect pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as FIG. 63) that is won during blackout after the countdown of the countdown zone is completed is executed.

  Step S818: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fourth section big hit effect pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as (i), (j), and (k) in FIGS. 51 and 52) that is won in the last player participation type effect in the countdown zone is executed. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Then, when any one of steps S814 to S818 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 74).

[Fourth section big hit effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fourth section big hit effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the revival effect. More specifically, a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery for winning by a quarter) is executed using a production random number. If the lottery is won, it is determined that a revival effect is to be executed.

  As a result, when it is determined to execute the revival effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S822, and when it is determined not to execute the revival effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S826.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 sets “4” as the limit value (limit value setting means). Here, the limit value is a value that determines to which stage the player participation type stage can be advanced, and is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the limit value is set to “4”, the stage of the player participation type effect progresses only to “4 stages”. On the other hand, when the limit value is set to “5”, the stage of the player participation type effect proceeds to the final “5 stage”.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes a revival jackpot effect pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (FIG. 57, FIG. 58, etc.) to be won through the revival effect in the last player participation type effect in the countdown zone is executed.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 sets “5” as the limit value (limit value setting means).

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes a success prohibition section setting process (effect section setting means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting a time corresponding to the success prohibition section. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal jackpot effect pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as (i), (j), and (k) in FIGS. 51 and 52) that is won in the last player participation type effect in the countdown zone is executed.
Then, when either step S824 or step S830 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special big hit effect pattern selection process (FIG. 75).

[Success prohibition section setting processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the success-prohibited section setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 executes a predetermined random number lottery and checks whether or not the random number lottery is won (whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied). Specifically, a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery to win in 1/10) is executed using a production random number.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the random number lottery is not won (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S842. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the random number lottery is won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S844.

  Step S842: The effect control CPU 126 sets a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) in the success prohibition section.

  Step S844: The effect control CPU 126 sets a special extension time (for example, 6 seconds) in the success prohibition section.

  And after finishing the process of either step S842 or step S844, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the fourth section big hit effect pattern selection process (FIG. 76).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S854.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process at the time of special deviation (special effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  The effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the stay section in the countdown zone. The effect control CPU 126 can confirm the stay section by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the section management status command. The details of the special off-stage effect pattern selection process will be described later.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process at the time of deviation. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In this process, since it is a loss in the low probability state (normal section), an effect pattern that is not performed without executing the reach effect is selected, or an effect pattern that is lost after the reach effect is executed is selected. .
And after finishing the process of either step S852 or step S854, the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 72).

[Processing pattern selection for special off-time]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the above-described special off-stage effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay section is the first section or the second section. The stay period can be confirmed by the section management status command stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay section is the first section or the second section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S864, and confirms that the stay section is neither the first section nor the second section. When confirmed (No), the production control CPU 126 executes Step S862.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay section is the third section.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay section is the third section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S866. When it is confirmed that the stay section is not the third section (No), the effect control CPU 126 is Step S868 is executed.

  Step S864: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of deviation from the first section or the second section. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (FIG. 48, FIG. 49, etc.) that causes the countdown effect in the countdown zone to proceed and discontinue is executed.

  Step S866: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of deviation from the third section. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as (a), (b), and (c) in FIG. 50) that is shifted during blackout after the countdown effect in the countdown zone is completed.

  Step S868: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of deviation from the fourth section. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as (i), (l), and (m) in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52) that is out of place at the last player participation type effect in the countdown zone is executed. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Then, when any one of steps S864 to S868 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 78).

[Processing pattern selection process at the time of deviation from the fourth section]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect pattern selection process at the time of the deviation from the fourth section. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S880: The production control CPU 126 sets “4” as the limit value (limit value setting means).

Step S882: The offending effect pattern selection process is executed. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (such as (i), (l), and (m) in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52) that is out of place at the last player participation type effect in the countdown zone is executed.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect pattern selection process (FIG. 79) at the time of special deviation.

[Processing during production design variation]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described effect symbol variation processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning symbol display effect management process (executable section determining means). In the winning symbol display effect management process, a process of determining at which timing the effect symbols are to be displayed in a set of three in the variable display effect at the time of winning is executed. Details of the winning symbol display effect management process will be described later.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes an intensity-specific notice effect management process (entrance opportunity notice effect executing means). In the intensity-specific notice effect management process, a process of managing the content of the intensity-specific notice effect (entrance opportunity notice effect) that is executed when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a during the change of the symbol is executed. The details of the intensity-specific notice effect management process will be described later.

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect switch button effect management processing. In the effect switch button effect management process, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button. The display control CPU 146 is instructed to control the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result. For example, a process of monitoring the pressing state of the effect switching button 45 in the player participation type effect executed at the final stage of the countdown zone, and selecting an effect pattern that gradually opens the door image according to the pressing state. Run. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 71).

[Winning symbol display effect management process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the winning symbol display effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S904 and cannot confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than five. The confirmation of the number of changes after the special game can be realized by counting the number of changes of the special symbol after the special game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81). The reason for executing the following process only when the number of fluctuations after special game is less than 5 is that the display timing of the winning symbol will not be changed after the number of fluctuations after special game reaches 5 times. It is.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 126 does not execute the effect at the time of entry (winning symbol display effect) based on the lower start winning opening entry command after the special game after the number of fluctuations reaches 5, so after the special game After the number of fluctuations reaches 5, even if the lower start winning opening entry command is received, it can be ignored and the control burden can be reduced.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lower start winning opening entry command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lower start winning entry ball entering command is stored. It should be noted that the lower start winning opening entry command stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 is deleted when the lower starting winning opening entry command is not received in the command receiving process (step S400 in FIG. 68). The

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S908. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current time is a winning symbol displayable section. Here, when winning in the 1st to 4th changes (1st section or 2nd section) of the countdown zone, 3 types of selection time of “10 seconds”, “15 seconds” and “20 seconds” are selected at the time of winning. (Variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, “35”).

  In this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol at the time of winning is divided into a plurality of sections (section setting means). Specifically, when the hit variation of “10 seconds” is selected, the first half “5 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display disabled section, and the second half “5 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display enabled section. In addition, when the hit variation of “15 seconds” is selected, the first half “10 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display impossible section, and the latter half “5 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display possible section. Further, when the hit variation of “20 seconds” is selected, the first half “15 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display impossible section, and the latter half “5 seconds” is set as the winning symbol display possible section. Thus, although the start timing of the winning symbol displayable section is determined for the variation pattern, it cannot be determined by the player's appearance.

  For this reason, when the hit variation of “10 seconds” is selected, the effect pattern of “15 seconds” is not displayed in the first “5 seconds”, and the display pattern is not displayed in the form of three sets. In the case of the first “10 seconds”, the effect symbols are not displayed in the form of a set of three. When the hit variation of “20 seconds” is selected, the effect symbols are displayed in the first “15 seconds”. Are not displayed in a set of three. Note that the winning symbol displayable section is not set for the deviation fluctuation.

  Then, the effect control CPU 126 measures the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation, and determines that the current time is the winning symbol displayable section if the elapsed time has reached a value corresponding to the winning symbol displayable section. be able to.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current time is the winning symbol displayable section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current time is the winning symbol displayable section (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the random number lottery is won (whether or not a predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied). Specifically, a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery to win in a third) is executed using a production random number.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the random number lottery is won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the random number lottery is won (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81). The reason for executing this process is that the winning symbol is not always displayed even when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a in the winning symbol displayable section, but only in certain cases. This is to execute an effect of displaying.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning symbol lottery process. More specifically, a process of determining by drawing the type of effect symbols to be arranged in three (for example, whether the effect symbols are displayed as “1”-“1”-“1”, “2”-“ 2 ”-“ 2 ”is determined). However, when the winning symbol corresponds to a 15-round probability variable symbol, it can be limited to a specific display mode ("7"-"7"-"7").

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning symbol display effect selection process (entrance opportunity winning effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the effect symbols in a set of three according to the mode determined in the winning symbol lottery process. Thereby, the effect pattern temporarily set in step S814 of the special big hit effect pattern selection process (FIG. 75) is changed, and the effect symbol is displayed in a winning manner ahead of the winning symbol display timing initially determined. The Note that the remaining fluctuation time when the effect symbol is displayed ahead of schedule can be absorbed by the effect of the effect symbol being shaken.
As described above, when the winning opportunity winning effect is executed, the effect is executed by using the lower start winning opening entry command with a small control load for both the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control processing for the entire gaming machine.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

[Precautionary effect management processing by strength]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned intensity-specific notice effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S924, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

  Step S924: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than five. The confirmation of the number of changes after the special game can be realized by counting the number of changes of the special symbol after the special game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of changes after special game is less than 5 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S926. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81). The reason why the following process is executed only when the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 is that the notice effect by strength is not executed after the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 5.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 126 does not execute the effect at the time of entry (notice effect according to strength) based on the lower start winning opening entry command after the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 5, so after the special game After the number of fluctuations reaches 5, even if the lower start winning opening entry command is received, it can be ignored and the control burden can be reduced.

  Step S926: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lower start winning opening entry command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lower start winning entry ball entering command is stored.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S928. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

  Step S928: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the strength-based notice effect execution possible flag is set to ON (whether or not the specified effect execution condition is satisfied).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the strength-specific notice effect executable flag is set to ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S930. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the strength-based notice effect executable flag is set to ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81). The reason for executing this process is to avoid the fact that the notice effect according to intensity is executed too frequently.

  In this way, in this embodiment, every time the notification of the lower start winning a prize entry command is received, it is determined whether or not the strength-specific notice effect executable flag is set to ON, and the strength-specific notice effect is executed. Is done. For this reason, since the announcement effect according to the intensity can be generated many times during the change of one symbol, the effect of the effect can be improved while increasing the execution opportunity of the effect.

  Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice effect pattern selection process by strength (a notice effect execution means by strength). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the content of the notice effect according to strength to be actually executed while referring to the notice effect pattern selection table classified by strength.

  As described above, the notice effect according to the strength is executed every time the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a in principle, so that the player can be promoted to launch the game ball, and the game is increased accordingly. The operating rate of the machine can be improved. In addition, the strength-specific notice effect is an effect that is executed due to the game by the player, so that the player can feel as if the player has started the strength-specific notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, even when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored up to the upper limit number, the announcement effect according to strength is executed every time the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a. Therefore, the execution frequency of the notice effect according to the strength can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  Further, in the case of a normal gaming machine, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored up to the upper limit number, the ball entering the starting winning opening beyond that becomes an invalid ball. Therefore, the player stops the launch of the game ball. However, in this embodiment, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored up to the upper limit number, the notice effect according to the strength is provided. Since it is executed, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball, and as a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, when executing the announcement effect according to strength, the effect is executed using the lower start winning opening entry command with less control burden on both the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124, so that the gaming machine Overall, the efficiency of the control process can be improved. In addition, the content of the specific process of the notice effect pattern selection process according to intensity | strength is later mentioned using another flowchart.

Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 sets the intensity-specific notice effect executable flag to OFF. Thus, the strength-specific notice effect cannot be executed until the strength-specific notice effect executable flag is turned ON again.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

[Notification effect pattern selection processing by strength]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned intensity-specific notice effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current notice strength is “strong”. Since the effect control CPU 126 measures the elapsed time from the start of the change, the confirmation strength of the notice is confirmed by confirming the value of the notice strength stored in the notice strength information storage area based on the elapsed time. Can be realized. The effect control CPU 126 refers to the first storage area of the notice strength information storage area when the number of fluctuations after the special game is 1, and when the number of fluctuations after the special game is 2, the effect control CPU 126 2 Refers to the storage area. The effect control CPU 126 refers to the third storage area of the notice strength information storage area when the number of changes after the special game is three, and refers to the third notice area of the notice strength information storage area when the number of changes after the special game is four. 4 Refers to the storage area. Thereby, the notice strength corresponding to the number of fluctuations after the special game can be confirmed.

  As a result, if it is confirmed that the current notice strength is “strong” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S954 and cannot confirm that the current notice strength is “strong” ( No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S956.

  Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not there is a deviation variation based on the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S964. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S966. In addition, although it does not prescribe | regulate especially in the case of a small hit | chuckage fluctuation | variation, it can be considered that it is a deviation fluctuation | variation and can perform a process.

  Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current notice strength is “medium”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current notice level is “medium” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S958 and cannot confirm that the current notice level is “medium” ( No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S960.

  Step S958: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not there is a deviation variation based on the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S968. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S970.

  Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current notice strength is “weak”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current notice strength is “weak” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S962 and cannot confirm that the current notice strength is “weak” ( No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S976.

  Step S962: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not there is a deviation variation based on the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S972. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation is a deviation variation (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S974.

  Step S964: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the notice effect pattern at the time of losing when the notice intensity becomes strong by referring to the notice effect pattern selection table for strong use of deviation.

  Step S966: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a notice effect pattern at the time of winning in which the notice strength is strong by referring to the hit strong notice effect pattern selection table.

  Step S968: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a notice effect pattern at the time of losing when the notice intensity becomes medium by referring to the notice effect pattern selection table for losing.

  Step S970: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the notice effect pattern at the time of winning with the notice intensity being medium by referring to the hitting notice effect pattern selection table.

  Step S972: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a notice effect pattern at the time of losing when the notice strength becomes weak by referring to the notice effect pattern selection table for weak fall.

  Step S974: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a notice effect pattern at the time of winning when the notice strength is weak by referring to the hit weak notice effect pattern selection table.

  Step S976: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a notice effect pattern whose initial value is weaker than the weak notice value by referring to the initial value notice effect pattern selection table.

[First special symbol scenario determination table]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a first special symbol scenario determination table.
This table is used when the first special symbol starts to change (scenario defining means). Specifically, the table is referred to in step S626 of the change start notice strength determination process (FIG. 73). Further, the left column of this table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows a scenario prepared in advance.

Details of the variation pattern number are as follows.
(1) Fluctuation pattern number “21”: 14.4 second deviation fluctuation (2) Fluctuation pattern number “41”: 15.0 second deviation fluctuation (3) Fluctuation pattern number “61”: 0.6 second deviation fluctuation (4 ) Fluctuation pattern number “81”: fluctuation after 18.0 seconds (5) fluctuation pattern number “33”: fluctuation per 10.0 seconds (6) fluctuation pattern number “34”: fluctuation per 15.0 seconds (7) fluctuation Pattern number “35”: fluctuation per 20.0 seconds (8) fluctuation pattern number “51”: fluctuation per 12.5 seconds (9) fluctuation pattern number “71”: fluctuation per 22.0 seconds

  Here, in the present embodiment, in step S624 of the change start notice strength determination process (FIG. 73), a confirmation process is executed as to whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than five. When the number of changes after game is less than 5, the change pattern numbers “81”, “51” and “71” are not selected. This is because the variation pattern numbers “81”, “51”, and “71” are variation patterns that can be selected when the number of variations after special game is 5 or more.

  As described above, when the number of changes after special game is determined in step S624 of the change start notice strength determination process (FIG. 73), the change pattern numbers “81” and “51” defined in this table are used. ”And“ 71 ”do not make much sense. However, the confirmation process of the number of changes is not performed in step S624 of the change start notice strength determination process (FIG. 73), and the execution of lottery of the notice effect by strength is performed until the number of changes after special game reaches eight. After the change, the change pattern numbers “81”, “51”, “71” are not executed when the notice effect according to the strength is not executed, or even if some trouble occurs and the number of changes after the special game is less than 5. These selection values will be meaningful.

  Furthermore, in this table, since there are nine variation patterns and seven scenarios, detailed examination of the production pattern is not so troublesome, but there are a large number of combinations of variation patterns and scenarios (each 100 In the case of more than street), it is troublesome to examine each performance pattern. For this reason, by assigning a distribution value to an effect that cannot actually occur, it is possible to reduce the trouble of examining the effect pattern at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. The same applies to the following notice effect pattern selection table.

On the other hand, the details of the scenario are as follows.
(1) Scenario 1: Initial value (default)
(2) Scenario 2: Weak, medium, and strong for outlier fluctuations (3) Scenario 3: Medium and strong for outlier fluctuations (4) Scenario 4: Strong for outlier fluctuations (5) Scenario 5: Weak for perturbation fluctuations・ Medium / Strong (6) Scenario 6: Medium / strong (7) Scenario 7: Strong for fluctuation

  Here, the above scenario includes one or more parts. For example, scenario 2 is composed of 3 parts of “weak”, “medium” and “strong”, scenario 3 is composed of 2 parts of “medium” and “strong”, and scenario 4 is “strong”. It consists of one part.

  The numerical values in the figure correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 250, and the total value shown in the same row is 250.

Therefore, in the first special symbol scenario determination table, when the variation pattern number “21” is selected, scenario 1 is selected at a ratio of 250/250.
In addition, for the other variation pattern numbers “41” to “71”, scenario 1 is selected at a ratio of 250/250.
Therefore, in the first special symbol scenario determination table, scenario 1 is selected at a rate of 100% regardless of which variation pattern number is selected.

[Second special symbol scenario determination table]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a second special symbol scenario determination table.
This table is used when the memory of the second special symbol is acquired. Specifically, the table is referred to in step S424 of the lower start winning entrance entrance notice strength determination process (FIG. 68). Further, the left column of this table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows a scenario prepared in advance. The details of the variation pattern number and the scenario are as described above.

  In the second special symbol scenario determination table, when variation pattern numbers “21” and “41” are selected, scenario 1 is selected at a ratio of 180/250, and scenario 2 is selected at a ratio of 24/250. Scenario 3 is selected at a ratio of 23/250, and scenario 4 is selected at a ratio of 23/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “61”, “81”, “51”, and “71” are selected, scenario 1 is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Further, when the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35” are selected, scenario 1 is selected at a rate of 100/250, scenario 5 is selected at a rate of 126/250, and 250 minutes Scenario 6 is selected at a rate of 13 and scenario 7 is selected at a rate of 11/250.

  Therefore, in the second special symbol scenario determination table, different scenarios are selected according to the selected variation pattern number.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a certain scenario is prepared from the beginning, and one scenario is selected from the scenarios, and the notification strength is determined. There is no need to draw strength. For this reason, as long as the scenario is determined, the advance notice strength to be applied to each section is automatically determined thereafter, so that the processing burden when determining the advance notice strength can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since a scenario in which the notice strength increases step by step is prepared, it is possible to gradually increase the contents of the effect toward the final effect at the time of winning. Therefore, since the announcement effect with higher reliability is executed the closer to the time when the effect symbol is displayed in the winning mode, it is noticed by strength that the section in which the effect at the time of winning is eventually approaching. It can be suggested by the production.

[Initial value notice effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an initial value notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table used when the notice strength is set to the initial value (default) (the notice effect pattern defining means by strength). More specifically, the table is referred to in step S976 of the strength-specific notice effect pattern selection process (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number are as described above.

The details of the production contents are as follows.
(1) No production: No production is performed.
(2) Lightning bolt small: An effect in which a small light effect is displayed is executed.
(3) During lightning: An effect in which a small lightning is displayed is executed.
(4) Lightning Large: An effect in which a large lightning is displayed is executed.
(5) Weak characters: An effect in which a hatena mark is displayed is executed.
(6) Middle character: An effect in which one surprise mark is displayed is executed.
(7) Strong character: An effect in which three surprise marks are displayed is executed.
(8) Weak character: An effect is displayed in which a maximum of one ally character is displayed.
(9) Middle character: An effect is displayed in which a maximum of two friendly characters are displayed.
(10) Strong character: An effect is displayed in which a maximum of three friendly characters are displayed.

  In the initial value notice effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “21” and “41” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 200/250, and “20/250” “Lightning Light” is selected, “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 20/250, and “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “61”, “81”, “51”, “71” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Further, when the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a rate of 170/250, and “lightning bolt small” is selected at a rate of 30/250. Then, “weak character” is selected at a ratio of 30/250, and “weak character” is selected at a ratio of 20/250.

  Therefore, in the initial value notice effect pattern selection table, relatively weak notice effects such as “no effect” and “lightning bolt small” are executed.

[Foreign weakening notice effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a missed weak notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table that is used when the notice strength is set to be weak due to fluctuations during non-winning (strength-specific notice effect pattern defining means). Specifically, the table is referred to in step S972 of the notice effect pattern selection process by strength (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  In the failure weak notice effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “21” and “41” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a rate of 170/250, and “30/250” “Lightning Light” is selected, “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 30/250, and “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 20/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “61” and “81” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Accordingly, in the weak weak notice effect pattern selection table, relatively weak notice effects such as “no effect” and “lightning bolt small” are executed. However, since the selection rate of “no effect” is set lower than the initial value notice effect pattern selection table, the various notice effects are more easily executed than the initial value notice effect pattern selection table.

[Foreign notice pattern selection table for out-of-service]
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a missed middle notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table that is used when the notice strength is set to “medium” according to strength when the notice strength is set to “medium”. More specifically, the table is referred to in step S968 of the strength-specific notice effect pattern selection process (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  In the out-of-track notice effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “21” and “41” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 20/250, and “ “Lightning Light” is selected, “Lightning Light” is selected at a rate of 50/250, “Weak Character” is selected at a rate of 30/250, and “Medium Character” is selected at a rate of 50/250 The “weak character” is selected at a ratio of 20/250, and the “medium character” is selected at a ratio of 50/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “61” and “81” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Therefore, in the out-of-track notice effect pattern selection table for intermediate use, notice effects with medium production reliability such as “lightning bolt”, “middle character”, and “medium character” are frequently executed.

[Foreign strong use notice effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a misplacement strong notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table that is used when the notice strength is set to be strong due to fluctuations during non-winning (strength notice effect pattern defining means). Specifically, the table is referred to in step S964 of the notice effect pattern selection process by strength (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  In the extraordinary strong notice effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “21” and “41” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 10/250, and “ “Lightning Light” is selected, “Lightning Lightning” is selected at a rate of 30/250, “Lightning Lightning” is selected at a rate of 45/250, and “Weak Character” is selected at a rate of 5/250. “Middle character” is selected at a ratio of 30/250, “Strong character” is selected at a ratio of 45/250, “Weak character” is selected at a ratio of 5/250, and 250 minutes “Middle character” is selected at a rate of 30 and “strong character” is selected at a rate of 45/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “61” and “81” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Therefore, in the extraordinary strong notice effect pattern selection table, a notice effect with a stronger effect such as “Lightning Large”, “Strong Character”, and “Strong Character” will be executed, and all the notice effects will be executed uniformly. Table.

[Attack effect pattern selection table for weak hits]
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a hit weakening notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table used when the notice strength is set to be weak due to the variation at the time of winning (notice effect pattern defining means by strength). Specifically, the table is referred to in step S974 in the strength-specific notice effect pattern selection process (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  When the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 140/250 and 30/250. “Lightning bolt small” is selected at a ratio of 10/250, “lightning bolt” is selected at a ratio of 10/250, “weak text” is selected at a ratio of 30/250, and “Chinese text is selected at a ratio of 10/250 “Character” is selected, “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 20/250, and “Medium Character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “51” and “71” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Therefore, in the weak hitting notice effect pattern selection table, relatively weak notice effects such as “no effect” and “lightning bolt small” are executed, but the effect reliability such as “lightning light” and “middle character” is executed. However, it is a table where a medium-strength notice effect is also executed.

[Preliminary effect pattern selection table for hits]
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a hitting announcement effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table that is used when the notice strength is set to medium (the strength-specific notice effect pattern defining means). More specifically, the table is referred to in step S970 of the strength-specific notice effect pattern selection process (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  In the winning announcement effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 20/250, and 20/250. “Lightning bolt small” is selected at a rate of 50/250, “lightning bolt” is selected at a rate of 50/250, “lightning bolt large” is selected at a rate of 10/250, and “weak” is set at a rate of 20/250. “Character” is selected, “Middle Character” is selected at a ratio of 50/250, “Strong Character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250, and “Weak Character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250. The “middle character” is selected at a ratio of 50/250, and the “strong character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “51” and “71” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Therefore, in the hitting announcement effect pattern selection table, distribution values are set for various notice effects, and the selection ratio of “no effect” is set extremely low. For this reason, this table is a table in which some notice effect is appropriately executed.

[Precision pattern selection table for hit strength]
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a hit strong notice effect pattern selection table.
This table is a table that is used when the notice strength is set to be strong due to a change at the time of winning (strength notice effect pattern defining means). More specifically, the table is referred to in step S966 of the strength-specific notice effect pattern selection process (FIG. 84). The left column of the table shows the variation pattern number, and the upper column shows the production contents. The details of the variation pattern number and the contents of the production are as described above.

  In the winning strong notice effect pattern selection table, when the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35” are selected, “lightning bolt small” is selected at a ratio of 5/250, and 20/250. "Lightning Light" is selected at a rate of 65/250, "Lightning Light" is selected at a rate of 65/250, "Weak Text" is selected at a rate of 5/250, and “Strong” is selected at a ratio of 65/250, “weak character” is selected at a ratio of 5/250, and “middle character” is selected at a ratio of 10/250. The “strong character” is selected at a ratio of 60/250.

  When the variation pattern numbers “51” and “71” are selected, “no effect” is selected at a ratio of 250/250.

  Therefore, in the hit strong notice display pattern selection table, relatively strong notice effects such as “lightning bolt”, “strong character”, and “strong character” are executed. For the variation pattern numbers “33”, “34”, and “35”, since the selection ratio “no effect” is not set, some sort of notice effect is always executed.

  94 and 95 are conceptual diagrams showing an outline of a method for setting the notice strength. FIG. 94 shows a setting method when the notice strength is properly set up to the change at the time of winning, and FIG. 95 shows a case where the notice strength of the change before the change at the time of winning is overwritten. The setting method is shown.

  Here, in this embodiment, in the normal mode, when the player enters the high probability time shortened state (countdown zone) corresponding to the 6 round probability variation symbol 1, the winning lottery zone concept and the notifying strength concept are used to win. It manages a series of notice effects.

[Notice lottery zone]
Here, the notice lottery zone is a section corresponding to one change in the countdown zone, and the section for one change is further internally divided into three (section A to section C). Since the countdown effect in the countdown zone is executed with four changes at the start of the countdown zone, there is a notice lottery zone for four changes internally.

[Notice strength]
For each section (section A to section C) of the notice lottery zone, the strength of the notice effect (notice strength) is set by lottery. The notice strength is set when the first special symbol starts to change, and the second special symbol is when the lottery element is stored.

In the present embodiment, the notice strength levels are the following seven stages.
(1) Initial value (default)
(2) Weak for deviation fluctuation (3) Medium for deviation fluctuation (4) Strong for deviation fluctuation (5) Weak for fluctuation (6) Medium for fluctuation per (7) Strong for fluctuation per 7

Here, “initial value (default)” corresponds to the lowest strength, and “strong for fluctuation fluctuation” and “strong for hit fluctuation” correspond to the maximum strength.
The lottery of the notice strength is executed for each scenario. Seven types of scenarios (scenarios 1 to 7) are also prepared. The details of the seven types of scenarios are as described above.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 94 and 95, the flow of determining the notice strength for the notice lottery zone will be described. The example shown in the figure shows an example in which the memory up to the first third memory is out of fluctuation and the last fourth memory is in a hit fluctuation. During the countdown zone, the winning symbol display timing (specifically, the winning symbol displayable section) varies depending on the type of hit variation, so when the stored lottery element is hit variation, it is the same as the hit symbol display timing. The notice strength is stored so that there is a strong force for fluctuation in the zone. However, in some cases, the notice strength may be won with the initial value.

[(A) in FIG. 94; F1] The first lottery element is stored. For example, in the normal mode, it corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 1, the 6-round jackpot game is executed, and the first special symbol at the end of the jackpot game. And the memory of the second special symbol are both “0”.
In this state, the first lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario is selected as “weak / medium / strong for scenario fluctuation (scenario 2)”.

  Then, the weakness for (2) deviation fluctuation is stored as the advance notice strength in the first fluctuation section A, and the medium for the deviation fluctuation is stored as the notice intensity (3) in the first fluctuation section B. In section C of the eye, (4) the strength for deviation fluctuation is stored as the notice strength. At this time, the notice strength from the second change to the fourth change is in an undecided state.

[(B) in FIG. 94; F2] Second lottery element is stored Next, the second lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario is “Medium / Strong for Out of Change (Scenario 3)”.

  Here, when the content of the scenario is less than 3 parts (in the case of 2 parts or 1 part), each part is stored right-justified. For example, when the content of the scenario is two parts, the notice strength is not stored in the section A, and the notice strength for two parts is stored in the sections B and C. In addition, when the content of the scenario is one part, the notice strength is not stored in the sections A and B, and the notice strength for one part is stored in the section C.

  For this reason, the notice strength is not stored in the section A of the second variation. However, in the second variation section A, (1) the initial value (default) is stored as the notice strength from the beginning. In the second variation section B, (3) for deviation deviation is stored as the notice strength, and in the second change section C, (4) strength for deviation fluctuation is stored as the notice strength. At this time, the warning intensity at the third change and the fourth change is in an undecided state.

[(C) in FIG. 94; F3] The third lottery element is stored. Further, the third lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored. At this time, it is assumed that “initial value (scenario 1)” is won as a scenario.
In this case, since (1) the initial value (default) is already stored as the notice strength in the third change section A to section C, the process of updating the stored contents is not executed. At this time, the notice strength of the fourth change is not yet determined.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the stored content is not updated every time the notification strength is determined, but the stored content is updated only when a strength other than the initial value (minimum strength) is determined. The intensity update frequency is reduced, and an efficient control process can be realized.

[(D) in FIG. 94; F4] The fourth lottery element is stored Finally, the fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored. At this time, it is assumed that “Small / Medium / Strong for Fluctuation (Scenario 5)” is won as a scenario.
Then, the weakness for (5) fluctuation is stored as the notice strength in the section A of the fourth change, and the medium for change of (6) is stored as the notice intensity in the section B of the fourth change. In section C of the eye, (7) strong for fluctuation is stored as the notice strength.

  In addition, character announcement effects (mini-character effects), lightning effects (effect effects), character effects, and other notice effects by strength are “current section over time” and “first special symbol change start time” Alternatively, it is determined by lottery based on “the notice strength determined at the time of storing the lottery element of the second special symbol”.

  Here, the strength-specific notice effect is an effect that is executed when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, so the strength-specific notice effect may be executed a plurality of times within one variation. In addition, the weaker the notice strength, the weaker the notice effect (notice effect that the winning symbol display timing is approaching) is executed, and the stronger the notice strength, the stronger the notice effect (the winning symbol display timing is approaching) The notice effect with a high feeling) is executed. Although not specifically defined in the present embodiment, in the case of executing a hitting confirmation notice effect, it is necessary to select a lottery mode that can be executed only with the notice strength of “for hit variation”.

  In this embodiment, since the notice strength is configured by a scenario in which the notice strength is set to be gradually increased, a notice effect that is executed by lottery is displayed in a stepwise manner. For this reason, a stronger notice is displayed as the hit symbol display possible section is approached, and as a result, the display timing of the hit symbol display can be suggested.

  Here, in the illustrated example, the winning symbol display section is set to the section C of the fourth variation. For this reason, the three notice strengths (weak, medium, strong) of the selected scenario can be stored as they are in one notice lottery zone (fourth variation). However, if the winning symbol display section is determined to be the fourth change section A or section B, the three notice strengths (weak, medium, strong) of the selected scenario cannot be stored in one notice lottery zone as they are. . Therefore, in such a case, the overwriting process shown in FIG. 95 is executed. Note that the processing content until the third lottery element from [F1] to [F3] is stored is the same processing content, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[(D) in FIG. 95; F5] The fourth lottery element is stored It is assumed that the fourth lottery element corresponding to the second special symbol is stored following the third lottery element. At this time, it is assumed that “Small / Medium / Strong for Fluctuation (Scenario 5)” is won as a scenario.

  In this case, the weakness for (5) fluctuation is stored as the notice strength in the section A of the fourth fluctuation, and the medium for the fluctuation of (6) is used as the notice intensity in the section B of the first change. In the first variation section C, (7) the strength for fluctuation is stored as the notice strength, but in the example shown, the winning symbol display section is determined to be the fourth variation section B. Therefore, the three notice strengths (weak, medium, strong) of the selected scenario cannot be stored in the fourth change notice lottery zone as they are.

  Therefore, in such a case, it is decided to overwrite the previous notice strength of the third change section C, and the three notice strengths (weak, medium, strong) of the selected scenario will be changed by two. It can be executed across. By such overwriting processing, it is possible to make the strength for hitting change present in the same notice lottery zone as the timing for displaying the winning symbol.

  However, if the third change has started and the warning strength of the third change section C cannot be overwritten, the process of overwriting the third change section C warning strength is avoided. Then, set the warning strength (medium / strong) excluding the warning strength (weak) that cannot be overwritten.

[Direction switching button management processing]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect switching button management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation in the fourth section of the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the value of the section management status command, and if the value of the section management status command indicates the value of the fourth section, the current variation is It can be determined that the variation is in the fourth section of the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation in the fourth section of the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S712, and this variation is a variation in the fourth section of the countdown zone. If it cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S714.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 executes a player participation type effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting various values related to the player participation type effect. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal effect switch button effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the pressing state of the effect switching button 45 in an effect executed outside the countdown zone, and an effect pattern that changes the content of the effect such as a conversation notice effect according to the pressing state. The process of selecting is executed.

  Then, when either step S712 or step S714 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 81).

[Player participation type production management process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the player participation type effect management process.
In the player participation type production management process, the production control CPU 126 executes a player participation type production that outputs a result of success or failure by using the operation input received by the production switching button 45 (player participation type). Production execution means).

  The player participation type effect management process includes an execution selection process (step S720), a game explanation effect selection process (step S722), a timer effect selection process (step S724), and an effect selection process when the effect switch button is pressed (step S726). , A sub-routine (program module) group of a successful effect selection process (step S728), a failure effect selection process (step S730), and a restoration effect selection process (step S732). Here, first, the basic flow of the player participation type production management process will be described along each process.

  Step S720: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S722 to S732) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the player participation type effect management process in the stack pointer as the return address.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the game explanation effect is not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the game explanation effect selection process (step S722) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the game explanation effect selection process has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the timer effect selection process (step S724) as the next jump destination. If the timer effect selection process has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect selection process when the effect switch button is pressed (step S726) as the next jump destination. Then, as the next jump destination in the effect selection process when the effect switch button is pressed, any of the success effect selection process (step S728), the failure effect selection process (step S730), or the restoration effect selection process (step S732) is performed. It is selected.

  Step S722: In the game explanation effect selection process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for explaining the game regarding the player participation type effect. More specifically, an effect pattern (for example, (e) in FIG. 51) that displays character information of “button hit repeatedly!” To teach the player that the player participation type effect has started. The process of selecting is executed. Note that once the game explanation effect selection process is executed during the countdown zone, it is not executed (skip) until the next entry into the countdown zone.

  Step S724: In the timer effect selection process, the effect control CPU 126 displays a button image in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect pattern that erases the cell of the hour meter one by one as the predetermined time (about 1 second) elapses. A process of selecting (for example, FIG. 51) is executed.

  Step S726: In the effect selection process when the effect switch button is pressed, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process for controlling various effects that are executed when the effect switch button 45 is pressed. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S728: In the successful effect selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that outputs a success result in the player participation type effect (success effect executing means). Specifically, an effect pattern (for example, an effect that causes the hermit character shown in (j) in FIG. 52 to perform an action) that conveys to the player that a successful result has been obtained in the player participation type effect, 52 (k), a process for selecting an effect or the like for teaching to enter the fireworks mode in the future is executed.

  Step S730: In the failure effect selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that outputs the result of failure in the player participation type effect (failure effect execution means). More specifically, an effect pattern (for example, an effect of closing the door shown in (l) of FIG. 52, or an effect pattern of (m) in FIG. ) To select the effect that teaches that the countdown zone shown in FIG.

  Step S732: In the revival effect selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that outputs the success result (executes the revival effect), pretending that the result of the failure is output in the player participation type effect. (Special success production execution means). Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern (for example, FIG. 57, FIG. 58, etc.) for transmitting to the player that a successful result has been obtained by reversal in the player participation type effect is executed.

[Production selection process when the production switch button is pressed]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect selection process when the effect switch button is pressed. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S750: The effect control CPU 126 executes a valid time timer countdown process (valid time setting means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a countdown of an effective time timer set in advance as “effective pressing time of the effect switching button 45”. Specifically, when this module is called for the first time, the effect control CPU 126 sets an initial value (for example, about 8 seconds) as the value of the effective time timer. Decrement the value of the set valid time timer.

  Step S752: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the present time is within the effective time of the effect switching button 45. This confirmation confirms whether or not the value of the valid time timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and determines that the current time is within the valid time if the value of the valid time timer is greater than 0. Can do.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current time is within the effective time (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S762. When it is not possible to confirm that the current time is within the effective time (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs the step. Step S754 is executed.

  Step S754: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a winning variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the winning variation is based on the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a winning variation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S758. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the change is a win (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S760.

Step S758: The effect control CPU 126 sets the revival effect selection process as the next jump destination in the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).
Step S760: The effect control CPU 126 sets the failure effect selection process as the next jump destination in the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Step S762: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect switching button 45 has been pressed. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not an operation (pressing) signal is output from the effect switching button 45.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the effect switching button 45 is pressed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S764. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the effect switching button 45 has been pressed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Step S764: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the button is pressed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes an initial button image to a pressed button image or displays an effect indicating that the effect switch button 45 is pressed (for example, FIG. 51). The process of selecting is executed.

  Step S765: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the winning count value is less than the limit value. The initial value of the winning count value is “0”, and is incremented by 1 every time a winning result is obtained in the step-by-step lottery process (step S772) described later. The winning count value is reset when the countdown zone ends. On the other hand, the limit value is a value set in the fourth section big hit effect pattern selection process (FIG. 76) and the fourth section shift effect pattern selection process (FIG. 80).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning count value is less than the limit value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S766. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the winning count value is less than the limit value (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97). As a result of this processing, when the winning count value reaches the limit value, the stage of the production does not proceed any further.

  Step S766: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect is the fourth step. Specifically, the winning count value stored in the RAM 130 is confirmed, and if the winning count value is “4”, it is determined that the stage of progress in the player participation type effect is the fourth stage. Can do.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect is the fourth step (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S768. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect is the fourth step (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S772.

  Step S768: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a winning variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the winning variation is based on the variation pattern command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a winning variation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S770. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the change is a win (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).
Thereby, since the following stage progress lottery process (step S772) is not executed at the time of non-winning, the burden of the control process can be reduced.

  Step S770: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current time is within the success prohibition section. This confirmation confirms whether the value of the valid time timer after the countdown process is “4 seconds or less” or “2 seconds or less”, and the valid time timer value is “4 seconds” or “2 seconds”. If the value is too large, it can be determined that the current time is within the success-prohibited section.

  Here, “4 seconds” is used as a reference when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) is set in the success prohibited section in the previous success prohibited section setting process (FIG. 77). The reference is the case where a special extension time (for example, 6 seconds) is set in the success prohibited section in the previous success prohibited section setting process (FIG. 77).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current time is within the success prohibited section (Yes), the production control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type production management process (FIG. 97) and confirms that the current time is within the success prohibited section. When it cannot do (No), production control CPU126 performs Step S772.

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 executes a step progression lottery process. Specifically, the lottery regarding whether or not to advance the stage of the production of the player participation type effect using the stage progression lottery table is executed. Details of the stage progress lottery table will be described later.

  Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the previous stage progress lottery process (step S772) is a win.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning is made (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S776. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm the winning (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Step S776: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing the winning count value stored in the RAM 130.

  Step S778: The effect control CPU 126 executes a step progress effect pattern selection process (step progress effect executing means). Specifically, an effect pattern that gradually opens the door image according to the value of the number of winning times is selected.

  For example, if the value of the number of winning times is “1”, an effect pattern ((f) in FIG. 51) is selected to advance the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect from “0 stage” to “1 stage”. If the value of the winning count value is “2”, an effect pattern ((g) in FIG. 51) is selected that advances the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect from “1 stage” to “2 stages”. To do.

  Also, if the value of the number of winning times is “3”, an effect pattern ((h) in FIG. 51) is selected that advances the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect from “2 stages” to “3 stages”. If the value of the winning count value is “4”, an effect pattern ((i) in FIG. 52) is selected to advance the stage of the effect in the player participation type effect from “3 levels” to “4 levels”. To do.

  Further, if the value of the number of winning times is “5”, an effect pattern ((j) in FIG. 52) is selected that advances the progress stage of the effect in the player participation type effect from “4 stages” to “5 stages”. To do.

  Step S780: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the winning count value is “5”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and compares the value of the number of winning times stored with “5”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning count value is “5” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S782. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the winning count value is “5” (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Step S782: The effect control CPU 126 sets the successful effect selection process as the next jump destination in the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

  When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the player participation type effect management process (FIG. 97).

[Stage progress lottery table]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a stage progress lottery table.
This stage progress lottery table is a table used at the time of lottery to determine whether or not to advance the stage of the stage in the player participation type production (production execution lottery winning probability defining means). Specifically, the table is referred to in the stage advance lottery process (step S772) of the effect selection process (FIG. 98) when the effect switch button is pressed.

  Also, the left column of this table shows the stay stage of the player participation type production, and the middle column shows the winning probability of the stage progress production when the winning variation is selected. The column shows the winning probability of the stage progress effect when the non-winning variation is selected.

[Stay Stage = 0]
When the stay stage is “0 stage”, in the production execution lottery to advance the stage of production to the next “1 stage”, the winning probability when the winning variation is selected is “1 / 2.5” The winning probability when the non-winning variation is selected is also “1/2”.

[Stay Stage = 1]
When the stay stage is “1 stage”, in the performance execution lottery to advance the stage of production to the next “2 stages”, the winning probability when the winning variation is selected is “1/2” The winning probability when the non-winning variation is selected is also “1/2”.

[Stay Stage = 2]
When the stay stage is “2 stages”, in the effect execution lottery to advance the stage of production to the next “3 stages”, the winning probability when the winning variation is selected is “1/2” The winning probability when the non-winning variation is selected is also “1/2”.

[Stay Stage = 3]
When the stay stage is “3 stages”, in the effect execution lottery to advance the stage of production to the next “4 stages”, the winning probability when the winning variation is selected is “1/2” The winning probability when the non-winning variation is selected is also “1/2”.

[Stay Stage = 4]
When the stay stage is “4 stages”, in the effect execution lottery to advance the stage of production to the next “5 stages”, the winning probability when the winning variation is selected is “1/5” It ’s harder to win than previous stages.
On the other hand, the winning probability when the non-winning variation is selected is not defined. This is because when the non-winning variation is selected, the stay stage is limited to the fourth stage, and the stage advance lottery process is not executed any more.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the “winning probability when the stage of production is advanced to five stages” is set lower than the “winning probability when the stage of presentation is advanced to other than five stages”. The hurdle for reaching the stage of production is set high. For this reason, it is difficult to progress to five stages as compared to progress to other than five stages.

  That is, even if the stage of production proceeds smoothly up to four stages, the stage of production is less likely to proceed than before. On the other hand, when outputting the result of failure, even if the stage of production proceeds smoothly up to four stages, the stage of production does not proceed thereafter.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the hurdle to reach the five stages when the winning variation is selected is set high, it is possible to resemble the situation there when outputting the failure result. . For this reason, it is impossible for the player to determine whether it is a high hurdle for finally outputting a success result or an unreachable hurdle for finally outputting a failure result. Therefore, in the final phase of the player participatory production, it is possible to give the player a sense of “which result will be output this time”, and the player's sense of expectation for the player participatory type production is to the end. Can last.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the variation of the winning is selected or the variation of the non-winning is selected, the winning of the effect execution lottery is performed with the same winning probability up to four stages. Probability is specified. For this reason, the stage of production progresses in the same progress up to four stages at the time of winning and not winning. Therefore, even in the process up to the 4th stage, it can be difficult to understand whether the result of success or failure will be output in the end, and the player's expectation will be maintained until the end. Can be made.

FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing changes in various states at the time of winning, which are executed by the final change in the countdown zone.
Here, (A) in the figure shows the change or stoppage change of the second special symbol, and (B) in the figure shows the valid or invalid change in the effective time of the effect switching button 45. In addition, (C) in the figure shows the change of the success prohibited section or the successful section in the player participation type effect, and (D) shows the contents of the effect executed in the player participation type effect. ing.

  Further, the difference between (C-1) and (C-2) in the figure is that (C-1) in the figure is a case where a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) is set for the success prohibited section (normally) (C-2) in the figure shows a case where a special extension time (for example, 6 seconds) is set for the success prohibited section (in the case of special setting). . In addition, an effect example corresponding to (C-1) in the figure is shown in (D-1) in the figure, and an effect example corresponding to (C-2) in the figure is shown in (D-2) in the figure. is there.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 100 (A): At time t0, the second special symbol is being stopped.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 100 (A): When a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at time t1, the lower start winning switch 82 detects the entry of the game ball. When the lower start winning switch 82 detects the entry of a game ball, the second special symbol starts to change in response to the detection. Here, it is assumed that the winning result is obtained by the special symbol lottery. In this case, the variation time of the special symbol is set to a certain time (for example, about 22.0 seconds).

[Time t1 to Time t2]
In FIG. 100 (D-1), (D-2): As the contents of the production, using the time from the time t1 to the time t2, the door closing effect indicating that the player participation type effect has been entered, or the game A game explanation effect that explains how to play the player participation type effect is executed. This is the same for both the normal setting and the special setting.

[Time t2 to Time t5]
In FIG. 100, (B): In the present embodiment, the valid time T1 for validating the operation input by the effect switching button 45 is set to 8 seconds, for example. Here, the “valid time” refers to the time when the operation input by the effect switching button 45 is valid, that is, the time when the effect control CPU 126 receives the contact signal generated by pressing the effect switching button 45 as being effective. .

  Therefore, in the illustrated example, the effective time starts when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the second special symbol (the operation input of the effect switching button 45 becomes effective), and thereafter the effective time T1 is The effective time will continue until it elapses.

[Time t2 to Time t5]
(C-1) in FIG. 100: In the normal setting, the time T2 corresponding to the success prohibited section (final stage arrival prohibited section) is set to the first 4 seconds, for example, in the valid time T1, and can be succeeded. The time T3 corresponding to the section (final stage reachable section) is set, for example, for the remaining 4 seconds (effect section setting means).

[Time t2 to Time t5]
In FIG. 100 (C-2): On the other hand, in the case of the special setting, the time T4 corresponding to the success prohibition section (final stage arrival prohibition section) in the valid time T1 is set to the first 6 seconds, for example. The time T5 corresponding to the succeedable section (final stage reachable section) is set to, for example, the remaining two seconds (effect section setting means).

[Time t2 to Time t3]
In FIG. 100 (D-1): In the case of normal setting, stage progress effects up to the stage prior to the final stage (five stages) are executed as the contents of the presentation from time t2 to time t3. In this case, although there is a possibility that the stage of production will proceed up to “4 stages”, the stage of production will not proceed until “5 stages”.

[Time t3 to Time t5]
In FIG. 100, (D-1): In the case of normal setting, a stage progress effect in which the stage of the effect progresses to the final stage (five levels) is executed as the effect contents from time t3 to time t5.

[Time t2 to Time t4]
In FIG. 100 (D-2): On the other hand, in the case of special settings, stage progress effects up to the stage before the final stage (five stages) are executed as the contents of the presentation from time t2 to time t4. In this case, although there is a possibility that the stage of production will proceed up to “4 stages”, the stage of production will not proceed until “5 stages”.

[Time t4 to Time t5]
In FIG. 100 (D-2): In the case of special settings, a stage progress effect in which the stage of the effect progresses to the final stage (five stages) is executed as the effect contents from time t4 to time t5.

[Time t5 to Time t7]
In FIG. 100, (D-1), (D-2): As the contents of the production from time t5 to time t7, a success production indicating that a successful result has been obtained in the player participation type production is executed. Is done. This is the same for both the normal setting and the special setting. Note that the revival effect is executed using, for example, the time from time t5 to time t7.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 100 (A): When the variation time of the second special symbol ends, the stop display time of the second special symbol starts.

[Time t7]
In FIG. 100 (A): When the stop display time of the second special symbol ends, the big hit game is started.

[After time t7]
In FIG. 100, (D-1), (D-2): As the contents of the effect, the big-game effect corresponding to the big hit game is executed. This is the same for both the normal setting and the special setting.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the entire valid time is divided into the “success prohibited section” and the “success possible section”, and even if it is a fluctuation at the time of winning, the stay in the “success prohibited section” While it is in progress, no successful performance is performed. For this reason, the successful performance is not executed unless the user stays in the “successful section”, and as a result, the hurdle at the final stage can be increased. Thereby, the situation of the case of outputting the result of success and the case of outputting the result of failure can be made closer, and the player's expectation can be maintained until the end.

  In the present embodiment, the normal setting (4 seconds) that is the basis for the success-prohibited section may be changed to a special setting (6 seconds). And if it is changed to the special setting (6 seconds), the time corresponding to the “successful section” will be shortened accordingly (2 seconds remaining), so the hurdle at the final stage can be further increased, until the end A player's expectation can be maintained.

[Lamp drive processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the lamp driving process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S980: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a normal control signal for a lamp or the like other than the light emitter 41. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132, and the lamp driving circuit 132 receives the signal to drive various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. based on the control signal ( Turn on or off, blink, change luminance gradation, etc.).

  Step S982: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the section management status command, and the value of the section management status command indicates any value from the first section to the fourth section. Thus, it can be determined that the gaming state is a game in the countdown zone.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S984, and when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is playing in the countdown zone ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

  Step S984: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of changes after special game is less than five. The confirmation of the number of changes after the special game can be realized by counting the number of changes of the special symbol after the special game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S986. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than 5 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67). The reason why the following process is executed only when the number of changes after special game is less than 5 is that the special light emission effect is not executed after the number of changes after special game reaches 5.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 126 does not execute the effect at the time of entry (special light emission effect) based on the lower start winning opening entry command after the number of changes after the special game reaches 5, so the change after the special game. After the number of times reaches 5, even if the lower start winning opening entry command is received, it can be ignored and the control burden can be reduced.

  Step S986: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a winning variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the winning variation is based on the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a winning variation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S988. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the change is a win (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67). In this process, it may be determined whether or not the lottery element that has already been stored is a winning variation, as well as the current variation.

  Step S988: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a lower start winning opening entry command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lower start winning entry ball entering command is stored.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S990. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the lower start winning opening entry command has been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

  Step S990: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the random number lottery is won. Specifically, a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery to win in 1/20) is executed using a production random number.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the random number lottery is won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S992. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the random number lottery is won (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67). The reason for executing this process is that the special issue effect is not always executed even if a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a during the winning variation, but only in a certain case. This is to execute a special issue effect.

Step S992: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for light emission to the light emitter 41 (special time shortening state transition teaching effect executing means). Thereby, since the light emitter 41 emits light and the above-described special light emission effect is executed, the player can know in advance the fact that he will enter the fireworks mode thereafter. The production control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for turning off the light emitter 41 when the big hit game is started.
As described above, when the special light emission effect is executed (when the light emission control signal is output to the light-emitting body 41), the lower start winning opening with a small control load for both the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124 is used. Since the effect is executed by using the entry command, the efficiency of the control processing can be improved as the entire gaming machine.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 67).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the lower start winning opening entry command is transmitted regardless of the number of stored lottery elements, the control process when transmitting / receiving the lower start winning opening entry command is performed. This simplifies the processing load on the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, specific set values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

  In the embodiment described above, the example of performing the advance notice according to the strength has been described with an example in which a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, but is automatically executed without being based on such an opportunity. It may be a notice effect.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice effect by strength is described as an example in which all the notice effects are managed by one table, but the notice effect may be managed by using a different table for each notice effect. In this case, the prohibited section of each notice effect can also be set individually.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 corresponds to the normal mode has been described as an example of directly shifting to the fireworks mode, but it may be allowed to enter the countdown zone.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example where the player participatory production is successful is won and the player participatory production is unsuccessful when the player participatory production is unsuccessful. The player participation type effect of the present invention may be applied to a promotion effect or the like during a major role.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example where the success prohibition section is always set for the player participation type effect has been described. However, the success prohibition section may not be set. In this way, the strength of successive hits is directly linked to an early success effect, so that the player's willingness to press can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26 during the countdown effect in the countdown zone, the winning symbol display effect, the strength-specific notice effect, and the special light emission effect are not executed. However, even when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26, the winning symbol display effect or the strength-specific notice effect may be executed.

  In this case, while adopting the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12), which is the second method, step S906 of the winning symbol display effect management process (FIG. 82) and the notice effect management process by strength In step S926 of (FIG. 83) and step S988 of the lamp driving process (FIG. 101), instead of confirming whether or not the lower start winning opening entry command has been received, “upper starting winning opening entry This can be realized by confirming whether or not a command or a command for entering a lower start winning opening is received.

  As a result, even when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26 or when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 28a, the winning symbol display effect, the notice announcement according to intensity, and the special light emission effect are executed. Will be. When adopting such a game specification, it is necessary to perform left-handed in the time-shortened state, the board surface configuration that does not make a right-handed in the time-shortened state, that is, the start gate 20 is arranged in the left-handed region, This is particularly effective in the case of a board configuration in which a game ball may possibly enter the upper start winning opening 26 even in a time shortened state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Upper start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Lower start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 First special symbol display device 35 Second special symbol Symbol display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (7)

A main controller that controls the progress of the game;
An effect control device that controls the effect content based on notification of information from the main control device,
Detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined winning opening;
A lottery element acquisition unit that acquires a lottery element as a lottery opportunity when a detection ball is detected by the detection unit;
An internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery related to a player's profit using the lottery element;
When the internal lottery is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery after displaying the symbol variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time triggered by this,
Lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number when the lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that enables the start of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied; ,
Provided in the main control device, when the detection means detects the entry of a game ball, the detection means enters the game ball regardless of the number of lottery elements stored in the lottery element storage means. A gaming machine comprising: ball detection information notifying means for notifying the effect control device of ball detection information indicating that a ball has been detected. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The detection means includes
First detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the first winning opening as the predetermined winning opening;
Second detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered a second winning opening different from the first winning opening as the predetermined winning opening;
The lottery element acquisition means includes
A first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a first lottery element as a result of occurrence of a first lottery opportunity as the lottery opportunity when the first detection means detects a game ball entering;
A second lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a second lottery element as a second lottery trigger as the lottery trigger when the second detection means detects a game ball entering,
The internal lottery execution means
First internal lottery execution means for executing a first internal lottery related to a player's profit using the first lottery element;
Second internal lottery execution means for executing a second internal lottery related to a player's profit using the second lottery element;
The symbol display means
When the first internal lottery is executed, the first symbol as the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and then the first symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the first internal lottery. A first symbol display means for stopping display;
When the second internal lottery is executed, the second symbol as the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time with the second internal lottery as an opportunity, and then the second symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the second internal lottery. Including a second symbol display means for stopping display,
The lottery element storage means
When the first lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the first symbol variation display to be started is satisfied, the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition unit is set to a predetermined upper limit number. First lottery element storage means for storing
If the second lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the start of variable display of the second symbol is satisfied, the second lottery element acquired by the second lottery element acquisition unit is set to a predetermined upper limit number. Second lottery element storage means for storing
The entrance detection information notification means includes:
When the second detection means detects the entry of a game ball, the second detection means enters the game ball regardless of the number of second lottery elements stored in the second lottery element storage means. A gaming machine, characterized in that ball detection information indicating that a ball has been detected is notified to the effect control device. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the state where the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, when the notification of the entrance detection information is received during the variation of the symbol, the internal lottery is performed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied. A gaming machine, further comprising a winning opportunity winning effect executing means for executing a winning opportunity winning effect that teaches a player that a winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
If notification of the entry detection information is received during the change of the symbol, a notice is given that the entry opportunity winning effect may be executed on condition that a specified effect execution condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising an entry opportunity announcement effect execution means for executing an entry opportunity announcement effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The entrance opportunity notice effect executing means is:
A gaming machine, wherein each time the notification of the detected ball detection information is received, it is determined whether or not the prescribed performance execution condition is satisfied, and the ball trigger opportunity announcement effect is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 5,
Special game execution means for executing a special game triggered by the symbol being stopped and displayed in a specific winning manner by the symbol display means;
When the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and the special condition is satisfied for the winning result, after the special game is finished by the special game executing means, it corresponds to the number of times the symbols are changed. In comparison with the low probability state from the low probability state in which the winning is obtained at least with a normal probability at the time of the internal lottery performed by the internal lottery execution means until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the first specific number of times The lottery opportunity is generated at a higher frequency than the non-time-reduced state at least from the non-time-reduced state where the lottery opportunity occurs at a normal frequency. Transition to the high probability time shortening state by transitioning to a possible time shortening state, and thereafter, until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the second specific number of times And special time shortening state shift means for shifting to shorter state special time by shifting in the low probability time saving state is a low probability state and the time saving state,
When the notification of the entrance detection information is received during the variation of the symbol at the time of winning that will be shifted to the special time reduction state after the special game is finished, provided that a special performance execution condition is satisfied And a special time shortening state transition teaching effect execution means for executing a special time shortening state transition teaching effect for instructing the player to shift to the special time shortening state after the end of the special game. A featured gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6,
The entrance detection information notification means includes:
Regardless of the gaming state, the entrance detection information is notified to the effect control device,
The entrance opportunity winning effect execution means, the entrance opportunity announcement effect execution means or the special time reduction state transition teaching effect execution means,
The entrance opportunity winning effect using the entrance detection information received during the period from the start of the high probability time shortening state until the post-special game variation count reaches a predetermined count, the entrance opportunity win effect, A gaming machine that executes a notice effect or a special time shortening state transition teaching effect.